1Configuring Oracle Field Service Cloud

Company Configuration

Each company choosing Oracle Field Service Cloud can configure it according to its specific requirements, such as what type of work is performed, what kind of skills are available for assignment, how the working calendars are organized, and so on. All such settings are gathered in the new Company Configuration screen designed in a transparent and logical manner.

Previously, the settings defining the company business flow were made on different screens which could be located in various places depending on the particular system configuration. By default, most configuration settings could be found under the Company Settings main menu item. However, during the system configuration some of them could be turned into individual menu items or grouped under different menu items. As of version 16.2, all company settings have been gathered on a single menu, Configuration, which is a starting point for all configuration processes. They are grouped according to their purpose and can only be found on the Configuration screen. The Configuration menu contains the configuration settings and parameters, which can be configured to meet your company’s business requirements.
Note: The options displayed on the menu depend on your user type configuration. The settings are listed in alphabetical order, but may appear in a different order in the menu based on your configuration.
The configuration elements are grouped as follows on the Configuration screen:
  • General (the settings related to the general principles of the company operation):

    • About

    • Business Rules

    • Link Templates

    • Work Schedules

    • Work Zones

    • Work skills

  • Resources, Activities, Inventories (the settings related to the resources the company employs, the activities it performs and the inventory used in the course of their performance):

    • Properties

    • Capacity Categories

    • Time Slots

    • Resource Types

    • Activity Types

    • Inventory Types

  • Displays (the settings related to the general appearance of the application, screen layouts, languages and translations):

    • Glossary

    • Action Management

    • Display

    • Themes

    • Filters

  • Users, Security, Integrations (the settings related to user management and system access):

    • Organizations

    • Login Policies

    • User Types

    • Applications

    • Oracle Knowledge

    • Integration Cloud Service

  • Subsystems (the settings related to Oracle Field Service Cloud modules):

    • Statistics

    • Daily Extract

    • Routing Profiles

    • Collaboration

    • Message Scenarios

    • Holidays

Items are added only to the groups listed above. Each item, when clicked, leads to the corresponding configuration screen.

    Configuration Screen Settings

    Access to the Configuration screen can be allowed or denied per user type, which means that all users of that type will either have the Configuration item in their menu or not. The visibilities that set the user access to this screen are hidden, read-write, and read-only.

    The items on the Configuration screen and their visibilities are configured in a dedicated context layout, Configuration. Similar to other context layouts, the Configuration screen is configured per user type, which means that all users of the selected type will see the same items on the screen with the same level of visibility. The Company Configuration context layout can include only the company configuration items. Therefore, the Add action window contains only the list of items related to company configuration. The reverse is also true—the company configuration items are not included in the action list of any other context layout.

      Action Management

      The Action Management Window

      The Action Management window lets you define action links and custom plug-ins.

      The application operates with entities relevant to the process of mobile workforce management – activities, resources, routes, inventory, and so on. At various stages of processing the entities, different users perform different actions. Depending on the user's role, certain actions are allowed or restricted. Action links result in events or changes to screens and data (based on the type and status of the target and parent objects).

      Access to the Action Management window is controlled by the Action management visibility. You must set this permission for each user type that you want to manage Action Management. If the action is not configured for the user type or if no visibility is defined, Action Management will not be visible to the user. If you select ReadOnly, Action Management is available in the view only mode. If you select Read/Write, the user can manage actions. You define the links in Action Management, configure them in the Screen Configuration section for each user type. When you configure the links, you add the links to the application’s contexts, making them visible to users with appropriate rights.

        View Action Management

        The Action Management window displays action links and custom plug-ins. This window also lets you create action links and custom plug-ins. For information on how to create a plug-in, see the Mobile Plug-in Framework guide.

        1. Click Configuration.

        2. In the Displays section, click Action Management.

          The Action Management screen appears and displays the following columns:

          Column Name Description
          ID System-generated number that the application assigns to records in its database – not used by anyone except Support team.
          Action Name Action or plug-in name appearing on the screen. The plug-in appears under this name in the actual context.
          Action Label Unique action or plug-in label.
          Base Action Action performed by the custom action.

          The base action from which the plug-in is to be derived, if needed. When a base action is selected, the resulting plug-in functions per the same rules as the base action. It appears only in the contexts in which the base action appears and is shown or hidden according to the same visibility conditions. For example, if start_activity is selected as the base action for a plug-in, the plug-in is only be shown in the context of a pending activity when there is no started activity in the same route, similar to the Start action. The list of available base actions is filtered according to the Entity that is selected.

          Entity The entity to which the action or plug-in is related.
          Interface The interface in which the action or plug-in is used. Select '*' to have the action or plug-in available in all interfaces.
          Plug-in The relative path or URL of the plug-in if the action is a plug-in.
          Actions The link to modify the action or plug-in.

          Base and Custom Actions

          The default action links available in the application are called base action links. These links perform the most common actions. Custom actions are created by the administrator, per your company's requirements.

          Base actions

          The following restrictions apply to base action links:
          • You cannot delete base action links.

          • You can edit only the action name.

          • You cannot change the behavior of base actions.

          • You cannot add new base actions.

          In the list of all the actions, the check box is disabled and the Base action column is empty for a base action.

          Custom actions

          A custom action is always related to a base action. That is, custom actions perform the same actions as base actions, but with certain custom features. For example, the Add Activity base action creates an activity of any available type. However, a teamwork activity can be created with only certain activity types, so a custom action is configured. This custom action is based on the Add Activity action but it adds activities only of the specified type.

            Create a Custom Action

            Custom actions are created by your administrator, based on your company requirements. A custom action is always related to a base action.

            The Add action link window is used for creating both, custom actions and plug-ins. The descriptions of fields in this procedure includes descriptions for both.
            1. Click Configuration.

            2. Click Action Management in the Displays section.

            3. Click Add action link.

              The Add action link window opens.

            4. Complete the following fields on the General tab:

              Field Description
              Action name (English) A mandatory field defining the action or plug-in name in the English language. The action or plug-in appears under this name in the actual context.
              Action name (other languages) Action or plug-in name translations to other languages, if used.
              Action label A mandatory field defining a unique action or plug-in label.
              Entity Entity (activity, inventory, required inventory, resource, service request, user) to which the action or plug-in is to be related. For example, if you select Inventory, the action will appear only in the contexts related to inventory.

              Leave the field blank for the action to be available in all contexts of all the entities.

              Interface The application interface (Manage or Mobility) in which the action is to be used. Select the '*' option for the action to be available in all interfaces.
              Base action Base actions to be performed as a result of the custom action. The list of available base actions is filtered according to the Entity you have selected. For example, if you select required inventory for Entity, then Base action lists only the actions related to required inventory.

              The base action from which the plug-in is to be derived, if needed. When a base action is selected, the resulting plug-in functions per the same rules as the base action. It appears only in the contexts in which the base action appears and is shown or hidden according to the same visibility conditions. For example, if start_activity is selected as the base action for a plug-in, the plug-in is only be shown in the context of a pending activity when there is no started activity in the same route, similar to the Start action.

              Is Plugin Whether the custom action is a plug-in. If you are creating a plug-in, you must select this check box. If you select this check box, the Plug-in details tab is added to the Add/Edit action link window and the Custom params tab is no longer shown.
            5. Complete the following fields on the Custom params tab (if applicable):

              Field Description
              Field A field related to the Entity selected on the General tab, for which you want to set the value. Select the field for which you want to set the value.
              Value The value that must be set on the field, while performing the custom action. Fields and values are added to the list under the corresponding entities.
              Action buttons Add: Adds the selected value under the corresponding entity.

              Edit: Lets you edit the selected value.

              Delete: Removes the selected value displayed under the entity.

              These settings define the value that are set on the selected field when the custom action or the plug-in is executed.

            6. Click Add to add more fields and values.

            7. Click OK to save the custom action.

              Create an Action Link

              The Add action link window is used for creating links both, custom actions and plug-ins. The descriptions of the fields in this procedure includes descriptions for both.

              1. Click Configuration.

              2. Click Action Management in the Displays section.

              3. Click Add action link.

                The Add action link window opens.
              4. Complete the following fields on the General tab:

                Field Description
                Action name (English) A mandatory field defining the action or plug-in name in the English language. The action or plug-in appears under this name in the actual context.
                Action name (other languages) Action or plug-in name translations to other languages, if used.
                Action label A mandatory field defining a unique action or plug-in label.
                Entity Entity (activity, inventory, required inventory, resource, service request, user) to which the action or plug-in is to be related. For example, if you select Inventory, the action will appear only in the contexts related to inventory. Leave the field blank for the action to be available in all contexts of all the entities.
                Interface The application interface (Manage or Mobility) in which the action is to be used. Select the '*' option for the action to be available in all interfaces.
                Base action Base actions to be performed as a result of the custom action. The list of available base actions is filtered according to the Entity you have selected. For example, if you select required inventory for Entity, then Base action lists only the actions related to required inventory. The base action from which the plug-in is to be derived, if needed. When a base action is selected, the resulting plug-in functions per the same rules as the base action. It appears only in the contexts in which the base action appears and is shown or hidden according to the same visibility conditions. For example, if start_activity is selected as the base action for a plug-in, the plug-in is only be shown in the context of a pending activity when there is no started activity in the same route, similar to the Start action.
                Is Plugin Whether the custom action is a plug-in. If you are creating a link for a plug-in, you must select this check box. If you select this check box, the Plug-in details tab is added to the Add/Edit action link window and the Custom params tab is no longer shown.
              5. Complete the following fields in the Plug-in detail tab:

                Field Description
                Type The plug-in type. The following options are available:
                • HTML5 application: The plug-in uses an external system to extend the functionality. An HTML5 application plug-in can be used in one of the following Mobility contexts - Activity List, Edit., View Activity, Inventory Grid or Add/Details Inventory.

                • Native application: The plug-in accesses another application on the same device.

                Use Plug-in API Available only for the HTML5 application plug-in type. Determines if the plug-in will work via a third-party Plug-in API or as a regular external plug-in.
                URL The path to a URL (for external plug-ins). This URL executes the HTML5 application and it executes the plug-in in the entire browser window. The URL must start with the protocol (https). When the plug-in type is native application, this field is hidden.
                The settings described below are only for internal and external types of plug-ins. The settings for native application plug-ins are described separately.
                Post Data If any data has to be sent by the external plug-in, such data is to be entered in the POST data field. This field is hidden if Use plugin API is selected, or if Native application is selected as the plug-in type.
                Disable Action Link in Offline Defines whether the plug-in is disabled in offline mode. Clear this check box for the plug-in to work in offline mode with Mobility Cloud Service. This field is hidden when Native application is selected as the plug-in type.
                Main Menu Item Whether the plug-in can be set as a Main Menu item through the Main menu context layout. This field is hidden if Use plugin API is selected, or if Native application is selected as the plug-in type.
                Tab/iFrame Layout Whether the plug-in uses the iframe layout. This field is hidden if Use plugin API is selected, or if Native application is selected as the plug-in type.
                Show Scrollbars Whether the window in which the plug-in runs has scroll bars. This field is hidden if Use plugin API is selected, or if Native application is selected as the plug-in type.
                Width, Height The plug-in window size in pixels. This field is hidden if Use plugin API is selected, or if Native application is selected as the plug-in type.
                Authentication The type of authentication used by the external server hosting the plug-in source to verify access to the plug-in. This field is hidden when Native application is selected as the plug-in type. The following choices are available:
                • Basic HTTP: The Basic Access Authentication method working over HTTP or HTTPS. The Basic HTTP authentication method requires a valid login and password. When the entered login and password are verified by the server, the server returns the plug-in content.

                • HMAC: Hash-based message authentication code verifying that the data is received from an authorized source. HMAC authentication method requires a secret key configured for each plug-in.

                Login The user name to log in to the plug-in. This field is displayed only when Basic HTTP is selected for Authentication. It is hidden when Native application is selected as the plug-in type.
                Password The password to log in to the plug-in. This field is This field is displayed only when Basic HTTP is selected for Authentication. It is hidden when Native application is selected as the plug-in type.
                Secret Key Displayed when HMAC authentication is selected. All parameters of the plug-in URL with replaced placeholders will be encrypted on the basis of the SHA-256 hash of the Secret Key value using the HMAC algorithm. The resulting string will be appended to the URL as the HMAC parameter. This field is hidden when Native application is selected as the plug-in type.
                Secure parameters The section where secure information such as user name and password used to access external sites is entered. This section is available only when Use Plugin API is selected. The data entered here is encrypted and stored. Use the plus icon to add a new key-value pair. You can add a maximum of 20 key-value textbox pairs, after which the icon is hidden. The maximum size of the parameters allowed is 5 KB. This size includes the data structure overhead and doesn't correspond to the length of keys and values of strings. Changes to the secure data are sent to Oracle Field Service Mobility Cloud Service during the next synchronization. The data is sent to the plug-in when the next message is sent.
              6. Complete the following fields for the Native application plug-in type:

                Field Description
                Native application name The name of the application to be launched by the plug-in.
                Browser user agents mask The browser in which the application is to be launched. The Native application link will be available in GUI, if the browser user agent matches specified mask. For example Safari, Android, iPad, iPhone, etc.
                URL template The template for building the external application URL from properties. The URL template contains parameters key and placeholders for parameters value. Properties are interpolated with placeholders, surrounded with braces "{" and "}". For example:

                http://www.copilotlive.com/copilot/android?type=LOCATION'&'action=View'&'alt={acoord_y}'&'long=|{acoord_x}'&'address={caddress|url}'&'city={ccity|url}'&'state={cstate}'&'zip={czip}

                The native application settings are organized in blocks. Initially, only one block is shown, if necessary, you can add more blocks by clicking Add. Each block sets one native application to be launched by the plug-in. The plug-in appears as a button which, when clicked, starts the application.

              Note: When you configure an Action Link using an enumeration field or property (that is, combobox) in the custom parameters, you must configure the value visibility as Read-Write or Mandatory in the User Types configuration. You must also configure the enumeration value as 'active'. For example: If you want to set value = '10' through an Action Link for the `level' property, then configure the corresponding value = '10' as a Read-Write or Mandatory property for that User Type. Ensure that the enumeration value of '10' is active as well.

                How to Host a Plug-In

                If your plug-in consists only of HTML, CSS, and JavaScript files and doesn't contain server-side files, then you can upload it in Oracle Field Service Cloud. No additional hosting is required. The plug-in framework handles the communication between the hosted plug-in and Oracle Field Service Cloud. You can host a maximum of 10 plug-ins per instance.

                The steps to host a plug-in are:
                • Prepare the plug-in for upload.

                • Upload the plug-in.

                After hosting a plug-in, you can:
                • Use it in an action link

                • Move between instances

                • Modify

                • Rollback to a previous version

                • Delete

                Note: A hosted plug-in works only with Oracle Field Service Mobility Cloud Service.

                  Preparing a Plug-In for Upload

                  The plug-in must be in a specific format to be uploaded. If not, you cannot upload it, you must host it elsewhere.

                  The plug-in files must meet the following requirements:
                  • You must upload a ZIP archive of the plug-in files.

                  • You can upload only the files of following types:
                    • .html

                    • .css

                    • .js

                    • .jpg

                    • .jpeg

                    • .png

                    • .gif

                    • .svg

                    • appcache

                  • You can organize files in sub-directories, but you must have the "index.html" file in the root folder.

                  • Each file can be a maximum of 1 MB and the total size of the compressed archive must be less than 500 KB.

                  • You can have a maximum of 10 files or directories in the archive.

                  Note: The plug-in files uploaded in Oracle Field Service Cloud are available by unique URLs on the Internet. The URLs are generated automatically and contain a long string. There is no authentication to access these files, so anyone who has the direct link to the file can download the file. Therefore, do not store any sensitive information such as passwords or login names in the plug-in archive. If you do not want your code to be available without authentication, we recommend that you do not use the hosted plug-in functionality. Be aware that the communication between the plug-in and Oracle Field Service Cloud starts only when a user successfully logs in to Oracle Field Service Cloud.

                    Working Offline

                    You can create the plug-in to work offline using the Application Cache functionality, which is specified in HTML5 specification (section "5.7 Offline Web Applications").

                    You can include the manifest file in the archive and associate your index.html file with it. For example, if the name of the manifest file is "manifest.appcache" then include the following code in the html file:
                    <html manifest="manifest.appcache">
                    Do not add this line if your plug-in is intended to work only online. Each version of the uploaded plug-in is hosted in a separate directory. If you use the application cache functionality, the browser considers each new version of the plug-in as a separate offline application. Further, by default the browser doesn't clean up the application cache of the previous versions of the plug-in. So, do not create too many versions of the plug-ins on the production instance.
                    Tip: If you experience an overflow of the application cache in the browser, clean up the offline cache of the browser.

                      Upload a Plug-In

                      You must upload the plug-in archive to use it as a hosted plug-in.

                      Uploading a plug-in includes:
                      1. Creating the name of the plug-in.

                      2. Uploading the plug-in archive.

                      1. To create the name of the plug-in:

                        1. Click Configuration > Action Management > Hosted Plugins.

                          The Hosted Plugins screen appears, with the list of existing hosted plug-ins.
                        2. Click the plus icon.

                          The Add Hosted Plug-in dialog appears.
                        3. Enter the name of the plug-in and click Add.

                          This name is displayed when you link the plug-in on the Action management screen. End-users do not see the plug-in name.
                      2. To upload the archive, click Browse on the Hosted Plugins screen and select the ZIP archive that is ready for upload.

                        The Version history section is populated with:
                        • The user name of the user that uploaded the files.

                        • The date on which the archive is uploaded.

                        • A link to download the archive.

                        To be able to use the plug-in, you must add it to an action link. See the Use a hosted plug-in in action link topic.

                        Modify, Download, or Delete an Archive

                        After uploading a plug-in archive, you might want to modify it, download it, or delete it.

                        1. To modify a hosted plug-in, you upload a newer version. To upload a newer version of the archive, click Browse on the Hosted Plugins screen and upload it again.

                          Whenever you upload a newer version of a plug-in, the following happens:
                          • The current version becomes a historical one.

                          • The previous version is removed from Oracle Field Service Cloud.

                          • The newly uploaded version becomes the current one.

                        2. To delete a plug-in first unassign it from all the action links it is added to. Then, click the minus icon on the Hosted Plugins page.

                          The plug-in is deleted with all its historical versions.
                        3. To download a plug-in, determine the version that you want to download in the Version history section. Click Download.

                        4. To rollback to a previous version, download the version that you want to rollback to. Click Browse and upload it again.

                        5. To move all the uploaded plug-ins between instances, export from the required instance using the Export function on the Action Management screen. Import the exported files using the Import function in the target instance.

                        6. To move a single plug-in between instances, download it from the required instance. Upload it in the target instance.

                          Using the Navigate Action

                          The Navigate action is a pre-configured link used to open a native navigation app on mobile devices. The Navigate link appears only when the user is online or offline and when activities have resolved coordinates.

                          The following links are pre-configured:
                          • Android devices (browser user agent mask = *Android*) open a navigation application by geo: protocol for Android browsers.

                          • iOS devices (browser user agent mask = *(?:iPad|iPod|iPhone)*) open Apple Maps.

                          • All other devices (Browser user agent mask = *) open maps.google.com.

                            Modify the Navigate Action

                            You can modify the Navigate action, but note that changing this configuration could impact the users in the field. We recommend that you test the application properly before changing.

                            1. Click Configuration > Action Management.

                            2. In the View drop-down list, search for Navigate.

                              The Navigate action appears.
                            3. Select the check box and click Modify.

                              The Edit action link window appears.
                            4. Click the Plugin details tab.

                            5. Click Add. Enter the Native application name, Browser user agents mask and URL.

                            6. Click OK.

                              The new Navigate action is saved.

                              Activity Types

                              An activity is any time-consuming task done by a resource (for example, installation, trouble call, lunch, team meeting, and so on). Each activity type includes a set of features, which are yes/no flags and define the way the activity type is processed. For example, whether activities of a specific type can be moved, created in bucket, rescheduled, and so on. Access to the Activity Types window is controlled by the Activity Types visibility. You must set this permission for each user type that you want to manage Activity Types. If the action is not configured for the user type or if no visibility is defined, Activity Types are not visible to the user. If you select ReadOnly, Activity Types is placed into a view only mode. If you select Read/Write for this setting, the user can manage Activity Types.

                              The following table provides a detailed description of the features that may influence the processing of activity from the back office applications through Oracle Field Service Cloud:

                              Table Features that influence activity processing

                              Feature If enabled, the activities of the type...
                              Allow to create from Incoming Interface … can be created from external systems, including Oracle Field Service Cloud ETAWorkforce
                              Allow move between resources … can be moved between resources
                              Allow creation in bucket ... can be created in bucket through routing plans and profiles
                              Allow reschedule … can be moved to another day
                              Support of not-ordered activities … can be not-ordered – such that can be started by the resource before/after any other activity within the route
                              Allow non-scheduled ... can be activities without a date
                              Support of time slots … can use time slots (time-period within which they are to be started can be defined)
                              Calculate activity duration using statistics … are estimated using statistics that are gathered at the resource level and company level

                                Search for an Activity Type

                                Every activity has a type. The activity type defines specific parameters of the activity, such as which time slot the activity takes place.

                                1. Click Configuration.

                                2. In the Resources, Activities, and Inventories section, click Activity types.

                                  The Activity types screen appears and displays the following columns:

                                  Column Description
                                  ID System-generated number assigned to records in the database – not used by anyone except the Support team.
                                  Activity Type Name The user-friendly name the end user sees in the drop-down list of choices on the Activity screen.
                                  Status Indicates if the activity type is being used.
                                  • Green check mark = Active and in use

                                  • Red X = Inactive and not used

                                  Activity Type Label A unique identifier for the activity type.
                                  Actions Links to the actions you can take on this activity.
                                3. Click View.

                                4. Type the activity type that you want to find in the Find field.

                                5. Click Apply.

                                  The results appear in the work area with the search criteria in bold.

                                  Understanding Activity Type Details

                                  This topic describes the fields available on the Add Activity Type screen.

                                  You can view the details of an activity type by clicking Modify in the Actions column of the Activity Types screen.

                                  Note: Some features are available only during the initial configuration. This will vary based on the options selected during the configuration. Features that are not available for editing after the initial configuration will be greyed out.
                                  The Add Activity Type screen displays the following fields:

                                  Field Description
                                  Activity type info section
                                  Label Unique identifier.
                                  Name User-friendly name that appears in the interface. Enter the name in English and in all the languages that are active in the application.
                                  Active Defines if the activity is active.
                                  Group The activity type group this activity type belongs to, for example, Customer, Internal, Teamwork, or Task.
                                  Default duration The time taken to complete the activity. This is the default value and it will be used when no statistics are available for the activity.
                                  Color Scheme Section - Color scheme allows defining colors for each of activity statuses and for warning with standard RGB color codes and palettes. Some of the colors are not available in the Mobility Supervisor Time View (Manage).
                                  Copy from The color palette to be copied from an existing Activity Type. The color scheme of the selected activity type is duplicated.
                                  Pending through Cancelled The color to show on the Time, List or Map views.
                                  Available Time Slots Section
                                  Available Time Slots The times slots for this activity type. Time slots are setup in Configuration > Time Slots. Select the check box to activate the time slot.
                                  Features Section- The features are yes/no flags, which define individual characteristics of the type processing. If the check box is selected then the feature is enabled.
                                  Teamwork When selected, the Activity type is allowed for teamwork. This option can only be selected while creating the Activity Type. When the Teamwork activity feature is enabled, the following activity type features are disabled:
                                  • Multi-day activity

                                  • Allow move between resources

                                  • Allow creation in buckets

                                  • Allow reschedule

                                  • Allow non-scheduled

                                  • Enable 'day before' trigger

                                  • Enable 'reminder' and 'change' triggers

                                  • Support of work zones

                                  • Support of work skills

                                  • Support of inventory

                                  • Support of preferred resources

                                  • Allow mass activities

                                  Multi-Day When selected, the Activity type is allowed for multi-day. This option can only be selected while creating the Activity Type. When you select Multi-Day, a new section, Multi-day activity, appears in the Add activity type window where the multi-day activity duration settings can be made. The following fields are displayed in the Multi-day activity section:
                                  • Minimal duration of a single segment: Defines the minimum length (in minutes) of each of the smaller tasks into which a multi-day activity is to be split.

                                  • Maximal total duration of segments created for a particular day: Defines the maximum total duration (in minutes) of multi-day activity segments for any day.

                                  When the Multi-day activity feature is enabled, the following activity type features are disabled:
                                  • Teamwork

                                  • Allow mass activities

                                  • Allow repeating activities

                                  • Enable 'day before' trigger

                                  • Enable 'reminder' and 'change' triggers

                                  • Enable 'not started' trigger

                                  • Enable 'SW warning' trigger

                                  Allow move between resources When selected, the activity type can be moved from one resource to another. This option cannot be enabled if Teamwork is selected.
                                  Allow creation in buckets When selected the Activity type can be created in a bucket.
                                  • This option cannot be enabled when Teamwork is selected.

                                  • This option can only be enabled if Allow move between resources is selected.

                                  Allow reschedule When selected allows the reschedule of an activity to another date.
                                  Support of not-ordered activities When selected the activity type can be a not-ordered activity.

                                  Not-ordered activities are the ones for which the order of execution is not defined. Such activities do not have an estimated time of arrival. The resource, dispatcher or routing may define the order (for example, command change order in mobile interface or edit activity command in web interface).

                                  Allow non-scheduled activities When selected this activity type can be a non-scheduled activity. This option cannot be enabled if Teamwork is selected.

                                  Non-scheduled activities are the ones that do not have a specific day of completion assigned to them.

                                  Support of work zones When selected, this defines if a resource work zone must be calculated. This option cannot be enabled if Teamwork is selected. If this option is selected and a work zone cannot be calculated, a warning is displayed when such an activity is moved; routing will not assign such activities. If using work zones, Business rules must be configured to allow support of work zones (Configuration > Business Rules > GUI features > Enable work zones support).
                                  Support of work skills If selected, work skills will be calculated and assigned to the activity based on any conditions met. Subsequently, only resources with matching work skills will be considered for assignment of the activity. If cleared, work skills are not considered and the activity can be assigned to any available resource.
                                  • This option cannot be enabled if Teamwork is selected.

                                  • This option does not depend on the Allow move between resources feature (as work skills are used not only to move activities but to calculate capacity).

                                  If using work skills, Business rules must be configured to allow support of work skills (Configuration > Business Rules > GUI features > Enable work skills support).
                                  Support of time slots When selected defines if time slots are required for activities of this type. This refers to pre-configured time slots within which the activity can be performed.
                                  Support of inventory When selected, this defines if inventory can be used for activities of this type (e.g. lunch breaks and meetings should not have inventory). This option cannot be enabled if Teamwork is selected.
                                  Support of links When selected, allows for the linking of predecessor/successor activity relationships.
                                  Support of preferred resources When selected, allows for resource preferences (Preferred Resource tab) to be defined for activities of this type. This option cannot be enabled if Teamwork is selected.
                                  Allow mass activities When selected defines if activities of this type can be Mass activities.
                                  • This option cannot be enabled if Teamwork is selected.

                                  • This option cannot be enabled if Allow move between resources is selected.

                                  • This option cannot be enabled if Support of not-scheduled activities is selected.

                                  Allow repeating activities When selected defines if activities of this type can be recurrent.
                                  • This option cannot be enabled if Allow move between resources is selected.

                                  • This option cannot be enabled if Support of not-scheduled activities is selected.

                                  Calculate travel When selected, defines if the travel time to an activity must be calculated. If an activity has Calculate travel enabled and has neither travel key (i.e., zip code) nor coordinates, a company default value will be used as a value of travel to and from the activity.
                                  • If the feature is enabled the algorithm implemented for activities is used for all activities of the type.

                                  • If the feature is not enabled (not selected) the travel time to activities of the type will always be calculated as zero (0) (as if location of activities of the type is the same as location of previous activity) and travel to the next stop also starts from this previous location.

                                  Calculate activity duration using statistics When selected, specifies that the activities are estimated using the statistics that are gathered at the resource level and company level.
                                  Allow to search When selected, specifies that the Oracle Field Service Cloud Search Engine indexes activities of this type.
                                  Allow to create from Incoming interface When selected, specifies that activities of this type can be created from Inbound Interface. Activities may originate from either Oracle Field Service Cloud or external systems.
                                  Enable ‘day before’ trigger When selected defines if day before trigger is invoked for activities of this type. This option cannot be enabled if either Teamwork or Multi-day Activity is selected. This option can only be selected while creating the Activity Type.
                                  Enable ‘reminder’ and ‘change’ triggers When selected defines if 'reminder' and ‘change’ triggers are invoked for activities of this type. This option cannot be enabled if either Teamwork or Multi-day Activity is selected. This option can only be selected while creating the Activity Type.
                                  Enable ‘not started’ trigger When selected defines if 'not started' trigger is invoked for activities of this type. This option cannot be enabled if either Teamwork or Multi-day Activity is selected. This option can only be selected while creating the Activity Type.
                                  Enable ‘SW warning’ trigger When selected defines if 'SW warning' trigger (Service Window warning) is invoked for activities of this type. This option cannot be enabled if either Teamwork or Multi-day Activity is selected. This option can only be selected while creating the Activity Type.
                                  Calculate delivery window Defines if a delivery window can be calculated for activities of this type.
                                  SLA and Service window use customer time zone (required for routing) When selected, supports SLA/Service Window adjustment changes. This feature must be used if the Support of time slots feature is enabled.
                                  Support of required inventory When selected, this defines if required inventory is supported for activities of this type.

                                  Activate, Deactivate, or Delete Activity Types

                                  You can activate, deactivate, or delete activity types.

                                  1. Select the check box next to an activity type.

                                    Action links appear at the top of the screen.

                                  2. Click the appropriate link, based on the action you want to perform.

                                    Note: Deactivate does not delete the activity type; it just makes it inactive.

                                    How Activity Duration Is Calculated

                                    Activity duration can be either defined manually or calculated using statistics that are obtained from learned durations.

                                    Note: You can specify durations for specific activities and technicians through APIs. For more information, see the REST API for Oracle Field Service Cloud guide.
                                    The manually-defined and statistical methods work as follows:
                                    • Manually-defined: If the Calculate activity duration using statistics check box is not selected in the Add activity type or Modify activity type screen, the duration specified at the time of creating the activity is used. If the duration is not specified in the activity, the default duration for that activity type is used.

                                    • Statistical: If the Calculate activity duration using statistics check box is selected in the Add activity type or Modify activity type screen, the duration of the activity is calculated based on statistical methods. If the history is not enough to calculate using statistics, the duration entered manually (if entered) at the time of creating the activity is used. If neither history nor a manually entered value is present, then the default duration for that activity type is used. The default duration is specified at the time of creating the activity type.

                                    Calculation of activity duration using statistics

                                    Activity duration estimations are calculated by the application based on the historical data of completed activities. The application analyses new data, compares it against previous estimations, and corrects the previous estimations, based on the new data, to obtain updated estimations for future usage. For this, the application uses two main statistics: company profile and personal profile. The application learns how each technician performs tasks and updates these statistics daily.
                                    • Company profile: The activity duration is calculated at the company level based on the Activity duration stats fields configured in the Statistics screen. All activities belonging to the same field value are grouped together for calculating the duration. The key is typically something that identifies similar activities as a single entity including fields such as Activity Type. When a technician performs tasks and reports the time against them, the company level estimate is derived for each task type based on the stats field values. The application gives more importance to more recent data for computation, rather than historic data. This increases the estimation accuracy and allows the application to respond to changes in trends in a timely manner. The default duration specified in the Add activity type screen is used as the starting point for estimating the duration. The application:
                                      • Refers to the previous experiences of similar tasks.

                                      • Calculates the estimate based on the summary of experiences.

                                      • Learns from new experiences.

                                      • Updates and remembers the updated experiences for future use.

                                      Every day the estimate is modified by a small amount, based on the durations reported on the previous day for similar activities. The correction applied is controlled to ensure that there isn’t too much deviation from the previous estimation and the estimated durations do not keep fluctuating on a daily basis; but is significant enough to respond to any trend change within a few days.
                                      The formula to calculate the new estimate is:
                                      New estimate = Previous estimate +/- Correction
                                      where correction is based on previous estimates and the differences between the estimated and reported durations.
                                    • Personal profile: Along with the company level estimate, the estimated time for the activity for the technician is computed in the form of a ratio. This ratio is calculated based on the company level estimate for the activity. The final estimate at the technician level is the product of the personal profile ratio and the company level estimate. Each technician may have different ratios for different types of activities, based on their performance. Similar to the correction applied to the Company level estimates, the Personal profile ratio is also updated by a small controlled amount every day, based on the durations reported by the particular technician on the previous day for similar activities. When a technician performs an activity for the first time, the default ratio is used.

                                    Some more important points about activity durations:
                                    • If the personal profile is not available for an activity key value, the default ratio for the technician is used.

                                    • The default ratio has an initial value that is specified in the Initial Ratio for Activity Duration field. This value will be updated each time the technician performs a relatively new activity.

                                    • You can specify which type of resources use personal profile. If this setting is not selected, such resource types will not use the personal profile and will use only the company wide estimations.

                                    • You can specify whether a resource affects the company level estimates. If it does, you can also specify the number of days to be skipped. The duration reported by only those resources that satisfy these two conditions is used to modify the company level estimates.

                                    • You can set upper and lower limits for activity durations. The values will always remain within the set limits.

                                    The fields that affect activity duration are:

                                    Field Screen

                                    Minimum and maximum relevant duration time in minutes

                                    Lower/Upper limit for personal ratio for duration calculation

                                    Statistics

                                    Default duration

                                    Calculate activity duration using statistics

                                    Add activity type and Modify activity type

                                    Personalize the estimation of activity duration

                                    Use durations reported to enhance company-wide estimations

                                    Do not consider reported data of the first x working days

                                    Add resource type

                                    Initial ratio for Activity Duration

                                    Working days left for reported data to start impacting duration estimations

                                    Resource Info

                                    Configuration examples

                                    Example 1: Application uses the duration that is provided at the time of creating the activity
                                    • Activity Type screen:

                                      • Default duration = 30

                                      • Calculate activity duration using statistics = not selected

                                    If the activity created has a duration of 50 minutes, that value (50) is used, if no value is provided at the time of creating the activity, 30 minutes is used.

                                    Example 2: New resource in the application has no historic data. The administrator wants to provide 20% more time than the estimated duration at the company level.

                                    • Resource Type screen: Personalize the estimation of activity duration = selected

                                    • Resource Info screen: Initial Ratio for Activity Duration = 120%

                                    • Activity Type screen: Calculate activity duration using statistics = selected

                                    • Assume company-wide estimation for the activity to be 45 minutes

                                    Since the resource does not have previous records for this kind of activity the initial (default) ratio is used for calculations. The estimated duration for the resource is: 45 * 120% = 54 minutes

                                    Example 3: Application uses technician’s learned duration with limits. Resource has performed activities of this type in the past and, hence, has a personal activity key ratio.

                                    • Statistics screen:

                                      • Lower limit for personal ratio to calculate duration = 50%

                                      • Upper limit for personal ratio to calculate duration = 200%

                                    • Resource Type screen: Personalize the estimation of activity duration = selected

                                    • Activity Type screen: Calculate activity duration using statistics = selected

                                    • Assume personal profile to be 90% and company-wide estimation for the activity to be 50 minutes.

                                    Since the personal activity key ratio falls within the set limits, it is used for estimations. The estimated duration for the resource is 50 * 90% = 45 minutes.

                                    Example 4: Application uses company duration without using personal profile

                                    • Statistics screen:

                                      • Minimum relevant duration time in minutes = 3

                                      • Maximum relevant duration time in minutes = 1440

                                    • Resource Type screen: Personalize the estimation of activity duration = not selected

                                    • Activity Type screen: Calculate activity duration using statistics = selected

                                    • Assume company-wide estimation for the activity to be 45 minutes

                                    Since the personal profile is not configured and the company-wide estimation is within the set limits, the estimated duration for the resource is same as the company wide estimation = 45 minutes.

                                      Pre-Calculated Travel Statistics

                                      Travel statistics are based on the actual durations reported by field resources. As such, new customers and existing customers expanding into new operating areas will not have actual durations in the application. With this release, the application will use pending activities to derive estimated durations. Using this method improves travel durations at the time of optimizing routes and moving activities.

                                      Oracle Field Service Cloud performs this process once a day:
                                      • Get the list of activities and their locations.

                                      • Estimate the probability of travel in future between each pair of ’Activity travel stats fields' (Travel Keys). The travel probability is calculated for all Travel Key pairs within the same travel area.

                                      • Calculate travel durations. The travel durations are calculated only between keys that share a common travel area.

                                      • Sort Travel Key pairs in descending order.
                                        Note: Travel Keys that have existing learned travel are excluded from the estimation process.
                                      • Estimate a maximum of 5,000 pairs based on the sorted list.

                                      After performing the process, the application has additional travel duration data. The next time Routing runs or a user moves an activity, the system uses the pre-calculated travel values. Calculating probability and sorting Travel Key combinations:
                                      • Only activities that have the address resolution to the level of 'Address' are considered for calculations.

                                      • Travel Keys that have at least (4) four activities are considered for estimation.

                                      • All activities belonging to the same Travel Key are considered to be in similar locations.

                                      • In the first cycle, the average travel duration within each Travel Key is calculated. This is done by selecting the corner most activities (based on x and y co-ordinates) within the Travel Key and the average distance between the locations. The Travel Keys are sorted in descending order of the number of activities, while sending the coordinates for calculation.

                                      • In subsequent cycles, the average travel time between different Travel Keys is calculated. Here, the sorting of Travel Key pairs is based on the number of activities present in both the Travel Keys involved.

                                      Example of sorting Travel Keys: Consider the following Travel Keys with the corresponding number of activities and travel areas:

                                      Travel Key Travel Area Number of Activities
                                      TK1 TA1 100
                                      TK2 TA1 150
                                      TK3 TA1 200
                                      TK4 TA2 50
                                      In this scenario, the Travel Keys are sorted as follows before being sent to the Location Service:
                                      • TK3-TK3 (within the same Travel Key)

                                      • TK2-TK2 (within the same Travel Key)

                                      • TK1-TK1 (within the same Travel Key)

                                      • TK4-TK4 (within the same Travel Key)

                                      • TK2-TK3 (between Travel Keys that share the same Travel Area)

                                      • TK1-TK3 (between Travel Keys that share the same Travel Area)

                                      • TK1-TK2 (between Travel Keys that share the same Travel Area)

                                        Configure Business Rules

                                        Business Rules help you configure the application to suit your requirements. These rules are configured on the Configuration tab.

                                        Business Rules includes items such as:
                                        • General features - such as enabling work zones, work skills, activity priorities

                                        • Maps and Gecoding - such as countries included in geocoding, zip/postal codes format

                                        • Quota Management – how quota is measured (minutes, hours, man-days) and recalculated

                                        • Search – identifying what fields are available in search

                                          Note: Search uses the first 40 characters of the search string.

                                        Access to the Business Rules window is controlled by the Business Rules visibility profile permission. You must set this permission for each user type that you want to manage Business Rules. If the action is not configured for the user type or if no visibility is defined, Activity Types will not be visible to the user. If you select ReadOnly, Business Rules is placed into a view only mode. If you select Read/Write for this setting, the user can manage Business Rules in Oracle Field Service Cloud. To configure Business Rules:

                                        1. Click Configuration.

                                        2. In the General section, click Business Rules.

                                          The Business Rules screen appears.

                                        3. Complete the following fields:

                                          Field Description
                                          General
                                          Work Skills Support

                                          Work Zones support

                                          If a feature is disabled (unselected) the settings defined for it are retained in the application, but no restrictions are applied.
                                          Work skills and work zones are critical settings greatly affecting performance, particularly, activity assignment to resources. When they are enabled, they impose the following constraints on the process of activities assignment and reassignment:
                                          • Routing takes into account work skills and work zones and assigns activities only to resources matching the work skill and work zone requirements of the activities.

                                          • All newly-created activities have work skills and work zones calculated for them and, therefore, will be correctly assigned afterwards

                                          • Self-assignment, Quota management, manual activities move or assignment are subjected to work skills and work zones check

                                          All these factors contribute to higher application performance and help improve the use of the workforce. Disabling work skills support and/or work zones support may result in Routing results below optimum and, therefore, must be used with care.

                                          Service Window Support If selected, by default the Service Window placeholder is selected when an activity or teamwork is created (must be defined).
                                          Points Support Select the box if you use points. When points are used, each shift and corresponding work schedule is assigned a certain number of points, which are a relative expression of the required work to be performed within such work schedule. Similarly, each activity may be also assigned a certain number of points. As the resource completes activities in their route, their points are added and compared to the total number required for the work schedule. Points may be used by Routing in activities assignment.
                                          Overnight Work The number of hours for overnight work since midnight. Used only if you have overnight work activities. Select the time zone used to define the work-day closure from the drop-down menu. If the value is greater than 0, it is possible to create activities for the previous day’s route and perform other route modifications based on the time zone setting value.

                                          Working time ____ hours since midnight <…..>

                                          This setting affects the logic of data saving by the Daily Extract functionality. If the company does not support overnight shifts, the extraction period covers time since the previous extraction till the end of the previous day. If the company supports overnight shifts, the Daily Extract data for the previous day are available for extraction after the overnight expiration, i.e., at 00:00 AM + overnight. If the data is extracted before that time, the resulting files will contain data of 2 days before. It is recommended to schedule Daily Extraction several minutes after the overnight expiration to guarantee that only the relevant data is extracted.

                                          Full-time Equivalent Used in the Planning section of Mobility Calendars. The value is a company wide setting. The value converts the calendar to a Full-time Equivalent resource. For example: If the resource works from 08:00-16:00 (8 hours) and the Full-time Equivalent value = 8 this resource will be shown as 1 Full-time Equivalent.
                                          Activity Priority Activity priority is used by Routing to assign urgent activities, immediate activities, and to prioritize activities for self-assignment on the map in Mobility. You can use any custom property of activity with type string, enumeration, or integer, but not fields. The configuration consists of the following parameters:
                                          • Property to define priority: Defines the activity property that will be used to identify urgent, immediate, and self assignment activities.

                                          • Urgent activities have the following values of the property: Defines the specific values of the property, which make the activity urgent or immediate. Several values of the same property can be used as criteria. In this case the values must be separated by commas in the field. The order of property values defines the priority level. The value listed first will have the highest priority, with other values following in the descending order. For example, if you have a privileged customer, you may specify it as a specific value (such as "PC") in an activity property, so it qualifies the activity as urgent. For enumeration properties, you must specify the enumeration values.

                                          • Normal activities have the following values of the property: Defines the specific values of the property, which make the activity normal. For example, in-house activity selected as "IN" in an activity property may qualify the activity as normal.

                                          When activities are routed using the immediate routing run option or the urgent routing option, the priority specified in the field that you select here are considered. For example, a company must always perform repairs as soon as possible to reduce service disruptions. In this case, the company may have a custom property which indicates that the activity is "Repair" to consider an activity as urgent.
                                          Enable the Visit functionality Define Bundling Keys for a Visit
                                          Visit Bundling Keys Define Bundling Keys for a Visit
                                          Maps and Geocoding
                                          Available Countries Geocoding is the process of finding associated geographic coordinates (latitude and longitude) from other geographic data, such as street addresses, or zip codes (postal codes). Geocoding data is required for Routing and is critical for Map/driving directions.

                                          Proper geocoding information is necessary for every country that this instance of the application is operating within. The Available Countries field allows adding additional countries for geocoding purposes.

                                          Select the + symbol to select an additional country form the drop-down menu. Select the pencil icon to edit the country name for localization purposes.

                                          Default Country for Geocoding Determines from which country the Available Country list above is used as the default country for geocoding.
                                          Zip Code Format Defines the format of ZIP (postal) code and state code values, when applicable. Both fields are used in the activity coordinates resolution from its geographic address. The ZIP value is validated by the Inbound API, therefore, its format is important. When the ZIP value sent by the Inbound API does not correspond to the format set in the Business Rule, the API returns an error. However, when the Free Post code option is selected, the ZIP value is not validated and will always be accepted.
                                          State Format The State format field includes Free format and US. Select US for addresses in the USA having a strict 2-letter state code format. For all other countries with different civil entity systems, select Free.
                                          GPS Identify technician by – Determines how a unique technician is identified within the context of GPS plotting.
                                          The following items are applicable with Oracle Field Service Cloud Smart Location Cloud Service:
                                          • Resource is considered idle if moved less than __ meters within _- minutes

                                          • Resource is considered to be at the activity location if the distance is less than __ meters -

                                          Map Parameters Defines the items related to the Map screen:
                                          • Distance Measurement Units: Specifies whether distance is measured in miles or kilometers.

                                          • Ignore coordinates with accuracy less than: Sets the minimum sufficient accuracy level for geocoding. The minimum sufficient accuracy level is the coordinate’s accuracy which is considered acceptable for usage. The coordinates below the specified level will not be used as insufficiently accurate.

                                          • Baidu Maps and Geocoding parameters: Indicates the server key and browser key for Baidu maps, which are used to authenticate the user or organization using the service.
                                            Note: Driving directions for Oracle map and geocoding are only shown in the following languages: (English (default), French, German, Italian, and Spanish). The default maps and geocoding provider is Oracle. Google or Baidu can be used, if it is part of your subscription. To use Google or Baidu maps, contact Oracle Sales. Further, you can have only one provider (Oracle, Google, or Baidu) configured in the application. Information about the geocoding provider is displayed on the Configuration > About screen, Enabled Services section.
                                          Map Layers Lets you add two types of map layers: Work Zone layer (work zone shapes) and custom map layers (for example, places of interest such as gas stations or gas pipelines) on top of the map. You can add a Work Zone layer or a new map layer, modify or delete an existing layer, and change the permissions for an existing layer. When you click Add new, the Add Map Layer screen appears. You can either upload shape files through the interface or through an API, or you can provide the path to MapViewer from where the custom layer is obtained. You also see the following sections:
                                          • Status: Indicates the status of the layer. If the shape file is uploaded successfully and is ready for use, the status displays a green check mark. If the shape file is not uploaded properly or has any errors, the status displays a red cross mark.

                                          • Map layers: Provides the name of the map layer and the date on which it was last updated. If the map layer is not available, this column provides the reason such as: Shape loading failed.

                                          • Permissions: User types to which the layer is assigned. If there are multiple user types, they are displayed as, ‘<user type> and <number> more’. For example, ‘Technician and 3 more’. This column is empty for the Work Zone layer.

                                            Note: The Permissions option is not available for a Work Zone layer.
                                          Properties of Work Zone layers:
                                          • Each Work Zone can have only one map layer, and if it does not exist, the message, No configured layers appears.

                                          • You can create only one Work Zone layer. After a Work Zone layer is created, the Create Work Zone layer option is grayed out on the Add map layer screen and the message "Only one layer for work zone shapes can be created" is displayed.

                                          • When you delete a Work Zone layer through the metadata API, only the layer is deleted. The shape files are not deleted from the database. However, when you delete a Work Zone layer from the Manage interface, by selecting the Delete associated shapes option, the layer and its associated shapes are deleted.

                                          Nearby Radius and Nearby SLA Defines the criteria of the nearby activities search in the Nearby screen of the Mobility application. It does not affect the Scheduling layer on the Map screen. The Scheduling layer shows all activities in the visible part of the map.

                                          The Nearby Radius value sets the radius of the circular area in which nearby activities is to be searched. The Nearby SLA parameter sets the SLA expiration period which activities must have to match the search criteria. The default values are 50 kilometers as the radius and 60 days as the SLA. The minimum values are 1 km and 1 day, respectively. The maximum values are 1000 km and 1000 days, respectively. As the result, the functionality searches a circular area with the center in the resource location and the radius equal to the Nearby Radius value, selecting the activities with SLA expiring within the period defined as Nearby SLA. Any activities not conforming to these criteria will not be included in the search results.

                                          Company Boundaries The latitude and longitude coordinates of the company’s geographical work area. Activities can be performed only within these boundaries that are a set of squares. To identify a square, its top left and bottom right corners are defined. If no boundaries are defined the company can perform work anywhere. Additional boundaries can be added by clicking the + symbol.
                                          Quota Management The following items are applicable with Oracle Field Service Cloud Capacity Cloud Service:
                                          • Measurement units for Quota and Available Capacity

                                            Defines the general settings affecting Quota Management functionality. Particularly, the user can choose the units of measurement to display Quota and Used values by setting the Quota and available capacity are defined in parameter. The available values are hours, man-days and minutes. Internally, all values are calculated in minutes anyway, and are converted to the selected unit when the corresponding value is displayed in the Quota View.

                                            When man-days is selected as the unit of measurement, the Number of hours per man day is field appears where the correlation between man-days and hours can be defined. Ultimately, this parameter is used to convert man-hours into minutes.

                                            When the Quota is defined as percentage of the capacity available by calendar, sometimes it requires adjustment. To adjust the value, the system estimates the capacity available by calendar, processes the already booked activities (to calculate the Other activities value), and, finally, recalculates the Quota in minutes using the defined percentage value.

                                          • Recalculation period

                                            You can set a predefined time interval for Quota and Capacity recalculation using the every [ ] minutesfield.

                                            Valid values: 1 to 1,440 minutes

                                            Default value: 10 minutes

                                            Also, you can recalculate quota and capacity for a predefined future period (defined as days or calendar weeks). For example, if you enter 10 minutes and set 3 calendar weeks for Quota and Capacity recalculation, then the recalculation occurs after every 10 minutes for 3 calendar weeks.

                                            The Calendar Week (duringdrop-down list) option is processed based on the value selected from the First Day of the Weekdrop-down list in the Display screen.

                                            When you use the Calendar Week option, all remaining days of the current week (unless the start day is the week start day selected using the First Day of the Week drop-down list) plus all days of the following weeks are considered.

                                            However, if the recalculation period is set to 7 days, the recalculation is performed for 7 days only. The maximum value for the Calendar Week option is set to 99 days or 15 calendar weeks.

                                            You can select the recalculation start day (current day, tomorrow, or day after tomorrow) from theThe Corresponding quota values are automatically adjusted starting from drop-down list.

                                            The Quota and Capacity is recalculated for the Available Capacity, Booking Status, and Quota screens.

                                            Note: When an activity is booked during the predefined recalculation period, then irrespective of the routing schedule and the specified recalculation period, the values in the Available Capacity, Booking Status, and Quota screens are recalculated immediately.
                                          Capacity Intervals See Define Time Intervals section in the Oracle Field Service Cloud Capacity Cloud Service Guide.
                                          Search Fields Define Search Fields for Core Manage and Define Search Fields for the Mobility Application

                                        How Geocoding Works

                                        Oracle Field Service Cloud attempts to geocode a location using the address data that is provided when the activity is created.

                                        The application uses the following fields when attempting to geocode the location:
                                        • Address (caddress)

                                        • City (ccity)

                                        • State (cstate)

                                        • Zip/Postal Code (czip)

                                        • Country (country_code)

                                        Data provided in these fields are submitted to the geocoding service without any modification or manipulation. When the geocoding service resolves a location, it returns a response with an accuracy level. In understandable terms it is accurate up to the address, accurate up to the street, and accurate up to the city. The location is resolved based on the selection made in the Ignore coordinates with accuracy less than setting on the Business Rules screen. For example:
                                        • If the value for Ignore coordinates with accuracy less than is Address, and the geocoding service returns Accurate up to the Intersection, the location is not resolved, because the lowest acceptable level based on the configuration is Address.

                                        • If the value for Ignore coordinates with accuracy less than is Intersection and the geocoding service returns Accurate up to the Address, the location is resolved, as it exceeds the lowest acceptable level based on the configuration of Intersection.

                                        Ignore coordinates with accuracy less than includes the following options in descending order:
                                        • Address: Indicates an accuracy level of the exact premise. Usually requires an exact match of the address (including house number, street name, street type/suffix/prefix), city, state, zip, and country.

                                        • Intersection: Indicates an accuracy level of a major intersection, usually of two major roads.

                                        • Street: Indicates an accuracy level of a street.

                                        • Route: Indicates a named route (such as US 101). This may not apply to all countries.

                                        • Zip: Indicates an accuracy level of the zip/postal code. May also require a city name and country match.

                                        • City: Indicates an accuracy level of the city. May also require the country name to be matched.

                                        • County: Indicates an accuracy level at the county level. This type may indicate a minor civil administrative level. Not all countries have this type of administrative levels.

                                        • State: Indicates an accuracy level at the state level. Within the United States, these administrative levels are states. Not all countries have this type of administrative levels.

                                        • Country: Indicates an accuracy level of the country. If you update an existing activity (with resolved coordinates) with a new country_code, the coordinates for the activity are reset to zero (acoord_x=0, acoord_y=0).

                                        The better the data quality, the more likely the location is resolved. For example - if you submit “10 Henr St Chartley, MA 02712”, the accuracy level will most likely result in something less then an accuracy level of Address, because Henry is misspelled. Other items to watch out for are extra characters or spaces in the fields, missing or wrong address prefix or suffix, abbreviations that do not match postal guidelines, a new address that is not in any geocoding service, wrong data (wrong zip/post code or street name), and partial data. Any of these items can cause challenges with resolving an address.

                                        Best practices

                                        • We recommend setting the Ignore coordinates with accuracy less than to Zip. Any other settings may result in fewer locations being resolved or too many locations resolved with a low level of accuracy.

                                        • Do not include additional address elements in the Address (caddress) field. The element includes but is not limited a business name, unit, flat, suite, floor number, and so on.

                                        • Avoid uncommon abbreviations, or abbreviations that are part of a defined standard used by the postal authority. It is possible that “Ave”, “Ave.” and “Avenue” can lead to different accuracy resolutions.

                                        • You may have to experiment to find the best way to send address data to Oracle Field Service Cloud.

                                        • When available, we recommend that you send us the geo-coordinates when you create activities. Send the values using Coordinate X (acoord_x) and Coordinate Y (acoord_y).

                                          Add a Map Layer

                                          Map layers are layers that are added on top of a map. The layers may include the places of interest that are specific to your business. You can add layers through an external source or internally through APIs. Use APIs to upload shape files for each layer that you want to create and configure it in the Manage screen. You can also add a layer for your work zone, which is visible to all users.

                                          If you are adding an internal map layer, you must upload a shape file through the metadata API.
                                          Note: Work Zone layers are not displayed on the Map view in Oracle Field Service Mobility Cloud Service.
                                          1. Click Configuration.

                                          2. In the General section, click Business Rules.

                                          3. In the Maps and Geocoding section, click Add new.

                                            The Add Map Layer dialog appears.

                                          4. Select whether you want to create a Work Zone layer or a map layer.

                                            You can add only one Work Zone layer; after you add it, the Create work zone layer option is grayed out.
                                          5. Enter the name of the layer in the preferred language.

                                            The languages displayed here are the languages that you have selected for Company language in the Display screen. This option is not available for the Create work zone layer option. The application adds the name ‘Work Zone Layer’ automatically and translates into the required languages.

                                          6. Add a label for the custom layer in the Label field.

                                            If you have added a custom layer through the metadata API, the name is suggested as you type it. If you have not added any layer through API and you do not add an external source, you cannot save the layer. This option is not available for the Create work zone layer option. The application adds the name ‘wz_layer’ automatically and translates into the required languages.

                                          7. Select the status of the layer in the Status drop-down menu.

                                            A layer with the Active status is available in Oracle Field Service Mobility Cloud Service, and a layer with the Inactive status is not available. This option is not available for the Create work zone layer option.

                                          8. Select the location from which you want to use the shape for the layer:

                                            • Upload shapefile later via API: Select this option to upload a shape file through API.

                                            • Upload shape now: Select this option to upload a shape file now. The following fields are displayed:
                                              • URL to shape file: Enter the URL to the location where the shape file is available. Use only a secure protocol, that is, a HTTPS URL.

                                              • Username and Password: Enter the username and password to access the shape file location.

                                              • SRID: Enter the shape identifier that was generated in the application in which the shape was created.

                                            • Use external data source: Select this option to use an external data source to display custom layers. This functionality requires Oracle MapViewer where the layers are created and stored. The following fields are displayed:
                                              • MapViewer URL: Path to MapViewer from where the layer data is obtained.

                                              • Data source: The source of the map layer data used by MapViewer.

                                              • Theme: Layer name in MapViewer.

                                              All the fields are mandatory. If a field is left empty, the window is rejected with the error message: {field_name} is empty.
                                            • Use already uploaded shape: Select this option to use a shape that is already uploaded. The list of available shapes is displayed and the following details are displayed:
                                              • Layer label: The label of the layer.

                                              • Last updated: The date on which the shape file was last updated.

                                              • Source URL: The URL in which the shape file is uploaded.

                                          9. Click OK.

                                            By default, users of all user types have access to the new custom layer. If the status is Active, the application verifies if:
                                            • Data for this layer is present in the database.

                                            • Data is consistent and not corrupted.

                                            • There are no errors when displaying the layer on map.

                                            If these conditions are satisfied, the layer is saved and displayed on the following Oracle Field Service Mobility Cloud Service map screens:
                                            • Team map: Accessed from Mobility > Map

                                            • Activity List map: Accessed from Mobility > Activity List > Map

                                            • Activity Details map: Accessed from Mobility > Activity Details > Map

                                          Review the following information before uploading shape files:

                                          Requirements for the shape file:
                                          • The shape file must be in a zip archive.

                                          • The shape file must be in the root of the zip archive, not inside any folder of the zip archive.

                                          • If more than one shape file is present in the root of the zip archive, the first shape file of the default zip archive reading sequence is processed and saved. The rest of the shape files are ignored.

                                          • Column names in the shape file must contain only alphanumeric characters and underscore ('_').

                                          • Column names must begin with an alphabet.

                                          Shape file restrictions:
                                          • When uploading a shape file using HTTPS, the following restrictions apply: WebLogic's default certificate validator does not accept certificates with wildcards (including Google Drive certificate).

                                          • SRID value should be a valid SRID.

                                          • A maximum of 2 GB is available for extracted shape file data that is uploaded and hosted in Oracle Field Service Cloud.

                                          • If a shape file contains a column with the name "SHAPE_AREA" (case insensitive), it is renamed as “SHAPE_AREA_".

                                          • If a column name is same as an Oracle Database reserved word, then an underscore ("_") is prefixed to the column name. The full list of Oracle Database reserved words is available at: Oracle Database Reserved Words.

                                          Recommendations:
                                          • It is recommended that you use shape files with compressed data size less then 50MB. The shape file data is extracted and stored in the browser memory (when showing to end user), so the size of the file may heavily influence the browser performance, including the inability to show the map layer.

                                          • It is not recommended to use polylines for work zones.

                                            Display Work Zone Layer on the Map

                                            After you add a Work Zone layer on the Business Rules screen, you can display it on the map. Before you display a layer on the map, you must select the shape identifier on the Edit Map Layer screen. The shape identifier helps you identify the shape when you are working on a different screen. For example, the shape identifier can be the internal serial number.

                                            1. To select the shape identifier:

                                              1. Click Configuration > Business Rules.

                                              2. Go to the Map layers section.

                                              3. Click Modify against the layer for which you want to add the shape identifier.

                                              4. In the Edit Map Layer screen, select a value in the Shape Identifier drop-down list.

                                            2. To display the Work Zone layer on the map:

                                              1. Click Configuration > Work Zones.

                                              2. Select or create the work zone for which you want add the shape identifier.

                                              3. Add the value of the shape identifier in the Work Zone Shapes field.

                                              4. Click Update or Add.

                                                The work zone shape corresponding to the selected shape identifier is displayed on the map.

                                              Update Shape Properties

                                              After you upload a shape, you can modify its properties such as visibility on the Map hint.

                                              1. Click Configuration.

                                              2. In the General section, click Business Rules.

                                              3. In the Map layers section, click the stack icon next to layer that you want to modify and click Modify.

                                                The Edit map layer dialog opens and displays the information in the Layer info and Shapes sections. The information in the Shapes section depends on the way in which you have uploaded the shape.
                                              4. Select a title for the shape in the Shape title column drop-down menu.

                                                This title is displayed for the shape on the Map view in Oracle Field Service Mobility Cloud Service.
                                              5. Fill up the following fields in the Shape hint columns section:

                                                Field Description
                                                Custom name Enter a meaningful name for the layer.
                                                Visible on hint Select whether you want to display the name in the hint on the Map view in Oracle Field Service Mobility Cloud Service.
                                              6. Click Save.

                                                The changes are saved.

                                                Assign Permissions to Map Layers

                                                When you upload a shape, by default it is available for all user types. You can change the permissions as to which users can see which shape.

                                                1. Click Configuration.

                                                2. In the General section, click Business Rules.

                                                3. In the Map layers section, click the stack icon next to layer that you want to modify and click Permissions.

                                                  The Select user types dialog appears. By default, all the user types are selected.
                                                4. To remove access to the selected layer, click the minus icon next to the user type.

                                                5. To provide access to a layer, click the plus icon. Select the check boxes next to the user types to whom you want to provide access.

                                                6. Click Save.

                                                  The changes are saved. The updated permissions come into effect the next time the user of the corresponding user type logs in.

                                                  Delete a Map Layer

                                                  You can delete just a map layer or a layer with its associated shape files as well. You can delete the layer either using the metadata API or through the Business Rules screen.

                                                  1. Click Configuration > Business Rules.

                                                  2. Go to the Map layers section.

                                                  3. Click the menu on the right against the layer that you want to delete and click Delete.

                                                    The Delete map layer dialog appears.
                                                  4. To delete just the layer, click Delete.

                                                    If you go to the Add map layer screen and select the Use already uploaded shapefile option, the shape file that was related to the deleted layer is displayed in the list.
                                                  5. To delete the layer and its associated shape files, select Delete associated shapes and then click Delete.

                                                    If you go to the Add map layer screen, the Use already uploaded shape file option is not available. This is because, the shape file that was associated with deleted layer was removed from the Geospatial Database.
                                                  6. Click Save on the Business Rules screen.

                                                    Note: Deleting a layer and its associated shape file is possible only through the Core Manage interface. The metadata API DELETE method removes only the layers from the database.

                                                    Define Bundling Keys for a Visit

                                                    Oracle Field Service Cloud sends configured notifications for each activity separately. In cases, where there are several activities (appointments) scheduled on the same day for the customer and you want to send one notification of each kind (for example, day before, reminder, or change notifications) to the customer, then select the Enable Visit Functionality check box to activate the Visit functionality.

                                                    The Visit Bundling Key field defines the criterion being used to define a visit. The criterion can include an activity property field, where you can set the length of the property values and determine whether the property values are case sensitive. The system compares the values defined in the activity fields against the specified criterion. Activities are grouped together as a visit, only if the values of all visit bundling keys match the specified criterion. To ensure that external system messages are sent in the proper way, you must add a launch condition using visit triggers while configuring message scenarios.

                                                    When routing is run using Immediate Assignment and if the Bundling setting is used (only available in Immediate Assignment routing), then the Immediate Routing plan uses the Visit Bundling key for route optimization. For example, when you use activity address as a bundling key and run routing for urgent activities, then routing finds activities that are on the same address as the urgent activity to create visits. For more details, refer to the Immediate Activity Assignment section in the Oracle Field Service Cloud Using Routing Cloud Service Guide. After you define the visit bundling keys, click Save to recalculate the existing activities according to the new visit settings. To define bundling keys for a visit:

                                                    1. Click Configuration.

                                                    2. Click Business Rules in the General section.

                                                      The Business Rules screen appears.

                                                    3. Select the Enable the Visit functionality check box.

                                                    4. Click the Modify icon.

                                                    5. Click the Plus icon.

                                                    6. Select the required keys.

                                                    7. Click Add.

                                                    8. Use the following filters to specify additional criterion for grouping activities:

                                                      • Length: Enter an integer value between 0 to 99. For example, if you enter 5, then the first 5 values of the activity property are considered.

                                                      • Function parameter: Select a parameter to determine whether the activity property values are case sensitive, case insensitive, first word case sensitive, first word case insensitive.

                                                    9. Click Save.

                                                      Note: If there are already visits in the system, and if the visit bundling keys are changed, then after recalculation, the visits no longer matching the keys are split into individual activities.

                                                      Define Bundling Keys for a Visit: Example

                                                      Assume that an installation activity is scheduled for a customer on 21st June, 2016 and is the only notification you send to the customer. The installation activity involves the activities, installing the hardware and installing the software but you want the customer to receive only one notification.

                                                      Assume that installing the hardware is assigned to technician William and installing the software is assigned to technician Philip. Both activities are scheduled on the same day at 4 to 5 pm and 5 to 6 pm respectively. Assume the following details for the customer:
                                                      • Account number: 123456

                                                      • Address: 77 Discovery Drive, Bozeman, Montana 59718

                                                      Since both the activities are performed on the same day for the same customer and at the same location, and the goal is to notify the customer only once, it is necessary to bundle the activities together and schedule a visit. Let us select Account Number and Address properties as the bundling keys from the Configuration, Business Rules page and click Save. Since the values defined in the activity fields (that is, Account number and Address) match the selected criteria (that is, Account Number and Address properties selected as the bundling keys); the activities, installing the hardware and installing the software, are grouped together as a visit. To verify whether the activities are grouped as a visit:

                                                      1. Select Dispatch, Activities.

                                                      2. Select the technician William from the resource tree.

                                                      3. Select the Installing the hardware activity from the dashboard and view the activity details.

                                                      4. Select the Links tab.

                                                        A Visit number is displayed with the Pending status.

                                                      5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for the Installing the software activity.

                                                        Define Search Fields for Core Manage

                                                        Oracle Field Service Core Manage Cloud Service uses the activity property fields defined in the Search section of the Configuration, Business Rules screen to search for Activities in the system.

                                                        You can also edit the activity property fields in the Search section of the Business Rules screen to define additional search fields to search for activities. For example, assume that the activities in the system are searched using Name and Account Number activity fields. Now, you want to search the activities using the Address activity field. You can specify an additional search field as follows:
                                                        1. Click Configuration.

                                                        2. Click Business Rules in the General section.

                                                          The Business Rules screen displays.

                                                        3. Click the Edit icon for Activity Search fields in the Search section.

                                                          The Activity Search Fields screen displays.

                                                        4. Click the Plus icon.

                                                        5. Select the Address field.

                                                        6. Click Add.

                                                        7. Click OK.

                                                          The Address field displays in the Activity Search Fields section.

                                                        8. Click Save.

                                                        9. Click the Core Manage Search icon and click the gear icon.

                                                          The Search preferences dialog displays the selected search categories.

                                                        10. Select the by Address check box.

                                                        11. Click the Back to Search button and enter an address, for example, 7700 Technology Way, in the Search field.

                                                          When a search is performed, the search fields are selected in the order defined in the Search preferences dialog. You can perform the following tasks in the Search Preferences dialog of the Core Manage Search option:
                                                          • Click the reorder icon to drag and drop the required activity search fields in the list to rearrange the order.

                                                          • Select or clear the required activity search fields to add or remove the activity search fields.

                                                          • Select an option from the Date drop-down list to refine the activity search results.

                                                          Note: Search uses the first 40 characters of the search string.
                                                        The activities matching the specified address display.

                                                          Define Search Fields for the Mobility Application

                                                          Mobility uses the inventory property fields defined in the Search section of the Configuration, Business Rules screen to search for inventories in Mobility.

                                                          You can also edit the inventory property fields in the Search section of the Business Rules screen and define additional search fields to search for inventories. For example, assume that the inventories in the application are searched using Model and Item Number inventory fields. Now, you want to search the inventories using the Serial Number field. You can specify an additional search field as follows:
                                                          1. Click Configuration.

                                                          2. Click Business Rules in the General section.

                                                            The Business Rules screen displays.

                                                          3. Click the Edit icon for Inventory Search fields in the Inventory Search Fields section.

                                                            The Inventory Search Fields screen displays.

                                                          4. Click the Plus icon.

                                                          5. Select the Serial Number field.

                                                          6. Click Add.

                                                          7. Click OK.

                                                            The Serial Number field displays in the Inventory Search Fields section.

                                                          8. Click Save.

                                                          9. Log in to the Mobility application.

                                                          10. Click the Search icon.

                                                          11. Enter the Serial Number (for example, 8779808797) in the Search field and click Search.

                                                            The inventory matching the specified serial number displays.
                                                            Note: Search uses the first 40 characters of the search string.

                                                            Capacity Time Intervals

                                                            The time interval set consists of time intervals delimited with a comma (","). Time intervals within the time interval set cannot have time period in common (with the only exception of a "point in time" time interval.

                                                              About Capacity Categories

                                                              A Capacity Category is a predefined set of work skills and/or work skill groups and time slots visible to a user who is booking the activities for the customers.

                                                              Based on the number of minutes available (Capacity = Initial Quota allocation minus used minutes), the user decides if enough time is available within a time slot to realistically promise a specific service window to the customer. This information is sent to the CSR via Capacity API. Capacity Categories are visible only if you are using the Oracle Field Service Cloud Capacity Cloud Service module.

                                                              Note: The Used Minutes value is calculated based on the exact time (in minutes) from start to end of a working day.
                                                              You must enable the Capacity Categories visibility profile permission for each user to access the Capacity Categories window:
                                                              • Read-Only: Select this option to display capacity categories in a view only mode.

                                                              • Read/Write: Select this option to let the user manage Capacity Categories in Oracle Field Service Cloud.

                                                              If the permissions are not configured for a user type, the activity types will not be visible to the users. Oracle Field Service Cloud maps the work skills to assign incoming activities to the resources. In general, many companies define quota for a work skill group rather than for an individual work skill. For example, separate skills are required for installation, un-installing and maintenance of modems, but from a scheduling perspective, quota is defined for all the modem-related works group.

                                                              A capacity category can also consist of a single work skill and the minimum required level of the skill level. For example, a category can be created for all the customer-oriented work and a separate group for VIP customers or for highly difficult tasks. The two categories would contain the same work skills but the minimal qualification level in the VIP group is higher. Because of the categories and the multi-skill functionality, the same activity can match several rows in the Quota table and can be added to the Used capacity several times. The duration of this activity will be taken into account for all the capacity categories it matches.

                                                                Create a Capacity Category

                                                                Create a capacity category to configure work skills, work skill groups and time slots.

                                                                1. Click Configuration > Capacity Categories.

                                                                  The Capacity categories screen appears.

                                                                2. Click Add New.

                                                                  The Add Capacity category window appears.

                                                                3. Enter the appropriate information in the following fields:

                                                                  The following table describes the fields available on the Add Capacity category screen.

                                                                  Option Description
                                                                  Name Enter the name of the capacity category. The name is displayed in the list and in the quota matrix. If the application is configured for multiple languages, input boxes will appear for each language.
                                                                  Label Specify a label. It is used in the context of APIs and it must conform to a standard naming convention.
                                                                  Active Select the Active check box to mark this capacity category as active. Only active capacity categories are used in the quota matrix.
                                                                4. Click Save.

                                                                  Once you create the capacity category, you must add work skills, work skill groups and time slots to the category.

                                                                  Modify a Capacity Category

                                                                  Edit an existing capacity category as and when you need.

                                                                  1. Click Configuration > Capacity Categories.

                                                                    The Capacity categories screen appears.

                                                                  2. Select the check box next to the capacity category that you want to change.

                                                                  3. Click the pencil icon in the Name column.

                                                                    The Edit Capacity Categories window appears.

                                                                  4. Change the fields that you wish to edit.

                                                                  5. Click Save.

                                                                    Delete a Capacity Category

                                                                    Delete a capacity category when you no longer need it.

                                                                    1. Click Configuration > Capacity Categories.

                                                                      The Capacity categories screen appears.

                                                                    2. Select the check boxes next to the capacity categories that you want to delete.

                                                                    3. Click Delete.

                                                                    4. Click OK.

                                                                      The selected capacity categories are deleted.

                                                                      Add or Edit Work Skills Within a Capacity Category

                                                                      A Capacity Category can contain one or more work skills and each work skill must meet a minimum required level.

                                                                      1. Click Configuration.

                                                                      2. In the General section, click Capacity Categories.

                                                                        The Capacity Categories screen appears.

                                                                      3. Click the pencil icon in the Work Skills column for the Capacity Category that you want to add or edit.

                                                                        The Edit Work Skill window appears.

                                                                      4. Select a work skill and add the minimum level of the skill required in the corresponding text box.

                                                                        The default value is 1. When the minimum level of a work skill is defined, an activity will match a Capacity Category, if a required skill level for the activity skill is equal to or more than the level of the Capacity Category.
                                                                        Note: If a capacity category contains a group of work skills, the activity matches the category if it requires at least one of work skills from the group.
                                                                      Recalculate activities after any edits or updates have been made to apply changes to pending and future activities in the system.

                                                                        Add or Edit Time Slots Within a Capacity Category

                                                                        A Capacity Category can contain one or more time slot associations.

                                                                        1. Click Configuration.

                                                                        2. In the General section, click Capacity Categories.

                                                                          The Capacity Categories screen appears.

                                                                        3. Click the pencil icon in the Time Slots column for the Capacity Category you want to add or edit.

                                                                          The Edit Time Slots window appears.

                                                                        4. Select a time slot.

                                                                        5. Click Save.

                                                                          Create a Group or Help Desk

                                                                          Oracle Field Service Cloud Collaboration enables communication between the application users and lets you organize help desk activities. You can use the chat window of Oracle Field Service Cloud Collaboration to access other data from the application, instead of using the Manage interface. For example, you can share details about a resource, an activity, or an inventory item or you can move activities and inventory. Oracle Field Service Cloud Collaboration is visible only if it is configured. This procedure describes how to create a group or help desk.

                                                                          The Collaboration screen shows settings that affect the way the user interface appears to the end user. While you may retain the default settings for most of these settings, you can change a few settings during implementation based on your business needs. Access to the Collaboration screen is controlled by the Collaboration visibility profile permission. You must set this permission for each user type that you want to manage Collaboration. If the action is not configured for the user type or if no visibility is defined, Collaboration will not be visible to the user. If you select ReadOnly, Collaboration is placed into a view only mode. If you select Read/Write for this setting, the user can manage Collaboration in Oracle Field Service Cloud. To create a group or help desk:
                                                                          1. Click Configuration.

                                                                          2. In the Subsystems And Integrations section, click Collaboration.

                                                                            The Collaboration screen appears.

                                                                          3. Click the + icon.

                                                                            The New group screen appears.

                                                                          4. Fill up the following fields:

                                                                            Field Description
                                                                            Name Name of the group or help desk you are creating.
                                                                            Type Type of group you are creating—options are group and help desk.
                                                                            Active Specifies whether the group or help desk is active.
                                                                            Description A description for the group or help desk.
                                                                          5. If applicable, click the pencil icon in the Groups to collaborate with section to select the groups that the newly created group can collaborate with.

                                                                            The Select Groups window appears.

                                                                          6. Select the required groups and click OK.

                                                                          7. If applicable, click the pencil icon in the Assisting Helpdesks section to select the help desks the newly created group can be assisted by.

                                                                          8. Select the help desks and click OK.

                                                                          9. Click Save.

                                                                            Edit or Delete a Group or Help Desk

                                                                            Oracle Field Service Cloud Collaboration enables communication between the application users and lets you organize help desk activities. You can use the chat window of Oracle Field Service Cloud Collaboration to access other data from the application, instead of using the Manage interface. For example, you can share details about a resource, activity, or inventory item or you can move activities and inventory. This procedure describes how to edit an existing group or help desk.

                                                                            1. Click Configuration.

                                                                            2. In the Subsystems And Integrations section, click Collaboration.

                                                                              The Collaboration screen appears.

                                                                            3. Select an existing group or help desk.

                                                                            4. To delete, click Delete.

                                                                            5. If applicable, click the pencil icon in the Groups to collaborate with section to select the groups that the newly created group can collaborate with.

                                                                              The Select Groups window appears.

                                                                            6. Select the required groups and click OK.

                                                                            7. If applicable, click the pencil icon in the Assisting Helpdesks section to select the help desks the newly created group can be assisted by.

                                                                            8. Select the help desks and click OK.

                                                                            9. Click Save.

                                                                              Configure Display settings

                                                                              The Display screen shows settings that affect the way the user interface appears to the end user. While you may retain the default settings for most of these settings, you can change a few settings during implementation based on your business needs.

                                                                              Access to the Display window is controlled by the Display visibility profile permission. You must set this permission for each user type that you want to manage Business Rules. If the action is not configured for the user type or if no visibility is defined, Activity Types will not be visible to the user. If you select ReadOnly, Display is placed into a view only mode. If you select Read/Write for this setting, the user can manage Display. To configure the display settings:
                                                                              1. Click Configuration.

                                                                              2. In the Displays section, click Display.

                                                                                The Display screen appears.

                                                                              3. Complete the following fields:

                                                                                Field Description
                                                                                General
                                                                                First day of the week The week that the working week begins.
                                                                                Time input The way time is entered in the application-whether it is chosen from a drop-down with fixed increments or is entered manually.
                                                                                Allow application to be launched inside iframe Lets you launch Core Manage Cloud Service in an iFrame.
                                                                                Remember User Name on Login Screen The control to display the Remember my username check box on the Login screen. Selecting the Remember my username check box saves the user name and populates it automatically, when a user uses the same device and browser to log in to the application. This feature is available only for users who have the Internal and LDAP login policies, and not for users who have the SAML or OpenID Connect policies. If a user’s authentication fails, the user name is not populated when the user logs in the next time.
                                                                                Enable password reset on Login screen Displays the Can’t sign in link on the Login screen, which helps users reset their passwords. Resetting the password is a global feature and is available only for users assigned to an Internal Login Policy. This is not available for users assigned to LDAP, SAML, and OpenID Login Policies. Selecting this check box displays the Email for password reset field.
                                                                                Email for password reset The source from which you want to get the email address of the user, who wants to reset their password. This field includes custom properties that can be chosen as the source of the email address to which the recovery email is sent. The custom properties are displayed only if the following conditions are satisfied:
                                                                                • Entity = User

                                                                                • Type = String

                                                                                • GUI = Text or Email

                                                                                Company time zones
                                                                                Time zones The globally available times zones. Use the Edit icon to add the required timezones.
                                                                                Company language
                                                                                Languages The globally available languages. Use the Edit icon to add the required languages.
                                                                                Login screen language The language used on the login screen when accessing the application.
                                                                                Mobile settings
                                                                                Number of activities per page The number of activities or resources to appear on one page on the mobile device. Default value is 5.
                                                                                Number of inventory per page The number of equipment records to appear on one page on the mobile device. Default value is 10.
                                                                                Number of days to view on the Calendar screen The number of days to appear on the mobile device at a time. Default value is 14.
                                                                                Idle time minimum The threshold under which idle time is not displayed on the Time View for Mobility.
                                                                                Quota settings
                                                                                Major Capacity Usage On the Quota grid, quota and minutes used display in brown once used = X% (major) of initial quota. Enter the percent of quota that indicates major capacity usage.

                                                                                Expected duration comprises [……] % of quota.

                                                                                Critical Capacity Usage On the Quota grid, quota and minutes used display in bright red once used = X% (critical) of initial quota. Enter percent of quota that indicates critical capacity usage.

                                                                                Expected duration comprises [……] % of quota.

                                                                                Enable Plan column that shows data set in Forecasting Whether a plan created in forecasting is available in the quota management screen.
                                                                                Alert settings
                                                                                Activity has not been started x minutes before the end of Service Window The activity turns red and a Resource Tree warning appears based on the value set in this field. Enter the number of minutes preferred.
                                                                                Activity has not been completed x minutes before the end of SLA Window The activity turns red and a Resource Tree warning appears based on the value set in this field. Enter the number of minutes preferred.
                                                                                Route has not been started x minutes after the start time of resource work day A warning appears on the resource’s record within the Resource Tree. Enter the number of minutes.
                                                                                Activity has not been started x minutes after ETA A warning appears on the resource’s record within the Resource Tree. Enter the number of minutes.
                                                                                Activity list settings
                                                                                Travel time representation The color for travel time, if a visual of travel time is desired on the Time and List views.
                                                                                Resource tree visualization
                                                                                Show assistants Shows assistants on the Resource Tree.
                                                                                Show teams Shows teams on the Resource Tree.
                                                                                Show activity/teamwork counters Shows the count of activities or teamwork on the Resource Tree.
                                                                                Map
                                                                                Fade resources Whether a resource becomes transparent after geolocation data update.
                                                                                Fade resource time The number of minutes after geolocation data update after which a resource’s time becomes transparent.
                                                                                Hide resource time The number of minutes after geolocation data update after which a resource’s time is hidden.
                                                                                Activity history
                                                                                Monitored activity fields The list of activity fields to be monitored. If one of these fields (or properties) is changed, a record is inserted into a corresponding history table. Use the Edit icon to add the required activity fields.
                                                                                Monitored inventory fields The list of inventory fields to be monitored. If one of these fields (or properties) is changed, a record is inserted into a corresponding history table. Use the Edit icon to add the required inventory fields.
                                                                                History user type The user type to be used to build the identifiers of objects (activities, inventory, and service requests) that are to be logged into the history.
                                                                              4. Click Save.

                                                                                The settings are saved.

                                                                              Set Up Company Language

                                                                              Manage the language setting specific to your company requirements.

                                                                              The application supports 23 languages to be set up as your preferred language.
                                                                              Note: A few terms (such as words used in report headers) may not get translated to the language selected as the company's preferred language.
                                                                              1. Click Configuration > Display

                                                                                The Display page opens.

                                                                              2. Under Company Language, select the appropriate languages from the available list and move them to the selected list.

                                                                              3. Select the Login Screen Language from the drop-down list.

                                                                              4. Click Save.

                                                                                The selected language is set.

                                                                                Note: The following languages are supported:
                                                                                • English

                                                                                • Chinese (Simplified)

                                                                                • Chinese (Taiwan/Mandarin)

                                                                                • Czech

                                                                                • Danish

                                                                                • Dutch

                                                                                • Finnish

                                                                                • French (European)

                                                                                • German

                                                                                • Greek

                                                                                • Hindi

                                                                                • Hungarian

                                                                                • Italian

                                                                                • Japanese

                                                                                • Korean

                                                                                • Norwegian

                                                                                • Polish

                                                                                • Portuguese (Brazil)

                                                                                • Romanian

                                                                                • Russian

                                                                                • Spanish

                                                                                • Swedish

                                                                                • Turkish

                                                                              Create a Filter

                                                                              Filters have two primary uses—first, filters narrow down lists of activities or resources within the workspace area based on defined fields and values. These filters are used within the Time, List and Map views. This provides an ad hoc reporting capability. Second, filters within routing plans predefine the information that determines how routing will distribute activities across available resources. These filters are commonly set up to differentiate the cost or value of assigning certain jobs to certain resources, as well as determining the priority of certain types of activities.

                                                                              Access to the Filters window is controlled by the Filters visibility profile permission. You must set this permission for each user type that you want to manage Filters. If the action is not configured for the user type or if no visibility is defined, Activity Types will not be visible to the user. If you select ReadOnly, Filters is placed into a view only mode. If you select Read/Write for this setting, the user can manage Filters. To create a filter:

                                                                              1. Click Configuration.

                                                                              2. In the Displays section, click Filters.

                                                                                The filters listing appears.

                                                                              3. Click Add New.

                                                                                The Add filter window appears.

                                                                              4. Complete the following fields:

                                                                                Field Description
                                                                                Filter The filter name that the users see. Enter the name in English and in all the languages that are active in the application.
                                                                                Applicable for The entity type (activity or resource) that the filter pertains to. The entity determines the table fields that can be selected when applying the filter conditions.
                                                                                List/Time/Map/Daily The views within which the filter is available.
                                                                                Routing Whether the filter is used within routing plans.
                                                                                Restriction of Visible Activities Whether you want to restrict filter activities from appearing if resource routes have not been activated or a working day has not yet begun. This configuration is related to the User Type. Once the filter is configured, apply the filter as a visibility restriction filter for user type.
                                                                                User Types The user types that the filter is available for. This field is displayed if you select the List/Time/Map/Daily check box. Use the arrow buttons to move the user types between the Available and Selected columns.
                                                                              5. Click Add.

                                                                                The filter is saved.

                                                                              You must add conditions for the filter. If no conditions are added, the filter does not work.

                                                                                Add a Filter Condition

                                                                                Use conditions to define the activity you are searching for.

                                                                                1. Click Configuration, Filters.

                                                                                  The Filters screen is displayed.

                                                                                2. Locate the filter you want to add a condition to.

                                                                                3. Click Conditions in the Actions column.

                                                                                4. Click Add New at the top of the screen.

                                                                                  The Add filter condition dialog appears.

                                                                                5. Complete the following fields:

                                                                                  Field name Action
                                                                                  Field Choose one or more activity or resource-based criteria on which to base the filter.
                                                                                  Dynamic Select the box if you want the user to type a value for the field that the condition is for.
                                                                                  Conditions Select one or more options to represent how the field selected above relates to the Value entry.
                                                                                  Value These are the options that can be associated with the Field chosen for this condition. If multiple values are applicable for this condition to be met, then add them to the Selected column. From the list of available values, click to select and then click the >> button. The selected item moves to the Selected column.
                                                                                6. Click Add.

                                                                                7. Navigate to the Work Area and verify that the filter is listed in the View drop-down menu.

                                                                                8. Test the filter to ensure that it meets your requirements.

                                                                                  Delete a Filter Condition

                                                                                  When a filter condition is no longer needed, you can remove it from the application.

                                                                                  1. Click Configuration. Click Filters from the Displays section.

                                                                                  2. Find the filter that has the condition you want to delete from and click the Conditions link.

                                                                                  3. Select the check boxes next to the condition that you want to delete.

                                                                                  4. Click Delete above the list of conditions.

                                                                                  5. Click OK.

                                                                                    Delete a Filter

                                                                                    When you do not need a filter anymore, you can remove it from the application.

                                                                                    1. Click Configuration. Click Filters from the Displays section.

                                                                                    2. Select the check boxes next to the filters that you want to delete.

                                                                                    3. Above the list of filters, click Delete.

                                                                                    4. Click OK.

                                                                                      About Glossary

                                                                                      Use the Glossary to configure the default names of UI elements to your business needs. For example, instead of the default term for the Activity Status, Completed, you can use the glossary to configure the term to display as Done.

                                                                                      You can configure the description of a UI element, only if the UI element corresponds to a glossary item in the Oracle Field Service Cloud glossary.

                                                                                      The changes made to glossary references are global, that is, the change is consistent for all users. However, the same glossary entry might belong to different categories or sub categories. For example, the glossary entry, Not Done belongs to the categories, Activity Status, Activity History Operation, Notification Trigger Name, and Action Link. If you modify the glossary entry, Not Done that belongs to the category, Activity Status, then the change does not affect other categories.
                                                                                      Note: The glossary entries for the Screen Configuration (Manage, Collaboration, Mobility, and Plugin) categories are configured for the selected user types.

                                                                                      The Glossary Visibility Profile permission that controls the access to the Glossary window for a User Type is set using the Company Configuration context in the Screen Configuration, Manage section. Only User Types that have Read/Write access can modify the glossary.

                                                                                      The following columns display on the Glossary page:
                                                                                      • Category: Displays the category and the sub category, if available, in the format, <Category:Subcategory>. For example, Activity: First Manual Operation.

                                                                                      • Label/ID: The label/ID of the glossary entry displays. If label is not available, the ID displays. You cannot change labels in the glossary.

                                                                                      • Columns for each language: The selected languages are displayed. See Add Languages Using the Languages Button.

                                                                                      You can click on the text highlighted in red on any of the Language column to view the number of missing glossary entries.

                                                                                      When you update one of the missing glossary entries, the red highlight on the text box disappears and the count in the Language column is updated. If no entries are missing, the warning text on the column header disappears.

                                                                                      Click the Search icon in the search field to list the glossary entries. You can select a specific category from the drop-down list next to the search box and enter a term in the Search field to search for the required glossary entries.

                                                                                      By default, the original text for all glossary entries is displayed. When you modify the original text of a glossary entry and click Save, the modified text is overwritten. However, the original text is still visible, when you hover the mouse over the modified text.

                                                                                        Modify a Glossary Entry using Placeholders and Glossary Editor

                                                                                        Oracle Field Service Cloud glossary items have a unique identifier referred to as placeholder IDs. The Placeholder ID that displays next to an UI element lets you identify the correct glossary item that you want to edit in the Configuration, Glossary page. For example, assume that you want to use the term, Show instead of the default term, View.

                                                                                        You can also modify the description of an UI element using an in-context editor so that you need not access the Configuration, Glossary page. This example explains how to modify the description of a UI element, View using placeholders and in-context editor. To modify a glossary entry:
                                                                                        1. Select your user name (for example, Admin) at the top right corner.

                                                                                        2. To modify the description of each UI element using placeholders:

                                                                                          1. Select My Display.

                                                                                          2. Select the Show Placeholder ID check box.

                                                                                          3. Click OK and refresh the page.

                                                                                            Each UI element that corresponds to an Oracle Field Service Cloud glossary item in the application displays an ID next to them.
                                                                                          4. Select Dispatch,Activities.

                                                                                          5. Make a note of the placeholder ID (for example, 8047) for the UI element, View.

                                                                                          6. Click Configuration.

                                                                                          7. Click Displays, Glossary.

                                                                                          8. Enter the Placeholder ID in the search field and click the Search icon.

                                                                                            The glossary entry displays.
                                                                                          9. Select English as the language and enter the term, Show in the field.

                                                                                          10. Click Save.

                                                                                            The glossary entry is modified and you can view the original text, View when you hover the mouse over the modified term, Show.
                                                                                        3. To modify the description of each UI element using the in-context editor:

                                                                                          1. Repeat steps 1 to 2.c from the above procedure.

                                                                                          2. Select your user name (for example, Admin) and select Glossary Editor is Off.

                                                                                            The in-context glossary editor is turned on.
                                                                                          3. Select Dispatch, Activities.

                                                                                          4. Select View.

                                                                                            An on-screen glossary editor displays.
                                                                                          5. Enter the term, View in the English field.

                                                                                          6. Click Save.

                                                                                          7. Deselect Glossary Editor is Off and the Show Placeholder ID check box from the My Display screen.

                                                                                          8. Refresh the page.

                                                                                            The modified description displays.

                                                                                          Export and Import Glossary Items

                                                                                          You can export the glossary entries to a .csv file to achieve the following goals:
                                                                                          • Translate a list of glossary entries to one of the selected languages that is set using the Languages button.

                                                                                          • Modify a list of glossary entries.

                                                                                            Note: It is recommended that updates are made using a text editor. Do not use Microsoft Excel, as it converts the .csv file from a comma-delimited file with quote qualifiers to a comma-delimited file without quote qualifiers.

                                                                                          Therefore, you can simultaneously update a list of glossary entries and import the updated list into the application. This example explains how to export a list of glossary entries related to the Category, Activity Hint and import the modified entries into the application. To export glossary entries:

                                                                                          1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                          2. Click Displays, Glossary.

                                                                                          3. Select Activity Hint as the Category from the drop-down list.

                                                                                            The entries related to Activity Hint display.
                                                                                          4. Click Export.

                                                                                            The Export dialog displays and by default, the languages that display on the Glossary page are selected. You can also export the entries to any of the deselected languages. To add a language, see Add Languages Using the Languages Button.
                                                                                          5. Select the Filtered option to only export the entries related to the Category, Activity Hint. Or, select the All option to export all the glossary entries.

                                                                                          6. Click Export.

                                                                                          7. Save the file in the .csv format, for example, test.csv.

                                                                                          8. Open test.csv, modify the required entries in the English (en-US) and Spanish (es-ES) columns, and save the file.

                                                                                          9. Click Import on the Glossary page, select test.csv, and click Import.

                                                                                          10. Click Save.

                                                                                            The modified entries display in the English and Spanish columns.

                                                                                            Add Languages Using the Languages Button

                                                                                            The Languages button enables you to select the active languages (that is, the languages that you want to display) on the Glossary page without accessing the Display, Company Language setting. Based on your selections, the Language columns (drop-down lists that let you toggle among the selected languages) are updated.

                                                                                            Note: You can only view two columns on the Glossary page.

                                                                                            To add an active language:

                                                                                            1. Select Languages from the Glossary page.

                                                                                            2. Click the Plus icon.

                                                                                            3. Select the language, for example, Spanish and click Add.

                                                                                              The selected language displays in the Languages list.
                                                                                            4. Click OK.

                                                                                            The selected language, Spanish displays as an option in both the Language columns.

                                                                                              Edit Property Descriptions for Multiple User Types

                                                                                              You can edit the description for properties for each user type and for each screen separately using the following categories:
                                                                                              • Screen Configuration – Manage

                                                                                              • Screen Configuration - Mobility

                                                                                              • Screen Configuration - Collaboration and Identifiers

                                                                                              • Screen Configuration - Plugin API

                                                                                              Each category has a sub category that is associated with the respective screen within Screen configuration.

                                                                                              For example, the sub category, Activity fields for export that belongs to the category, Screen Configuration – Manage is associated with the Activity fields for Export screen that belongs to the Screen Configuration – Manage within the Configuration, User Types page.
                                                                                              Note: If you share a screen configuration across multiple user types, then the properties of that screen configuration are also shared, and, therefore, any change to the description of a property of that screen configuration, affects all user types.
                                                                                              For example, if you share the screen configuration that belongs to the user type, Administrator using the Copy or share screen configuration, Use Screen configuration of option across user types, Technician and Field Engineer, even the properties of the screen configuration that belongs to the user type, Administrator are also shared.

                                                                                              Assume that the Activity fields for Export screen that belongs to the user type, Administrator has the property, Work Order and the screen is shared across multiple user types, Technician and Field Engineer.

                                                                                              When you edit the glossary entry for the Work Order property, the changes are also applied for the user types, Technician and Field Engineer.

                                                                                              By default, the Glossary page displays all properties for each screen within Screen configuration.

                                                                                              If there are custom names for any of the user types, then the original and custom names for the property are displayed in a comma-separated format for each language.

                                                                                              This example shows how to add a custom name, Job Code to the user type, Technician for the Work Order property in the Activity fields for export screen that belongs to the category, Screen Configuration – Manage. To edit a property description:

                                                                                              1. Click Displays, Glossary.

                                                                                              2. Select Screen Configuration – Manage from the drop-down list and click the Search icon.

                                                                                                The properties related to Screen Configuration – Manage display.
                                                                                              3. Click the Edit icon in the language column that is displayed for the Work Order property for the Screen Configuration - Manage: Activity fields for export category.

                                                                                                The property label, appt_number and the original name, Work Order display.
                                                                                              4. Click the Plus icon and select the user type, Technician.

                                                                                                Note: The Edit Custom Names for User Types screen and the Plus icon displays when there are custom names for user types. If there are no custom names for user types, then the Add screen displays when you click the Edit icon.
                                                                                              5. Click Add.

                                                                                              6. Enter the custom name, Job Code in the field.

                                                                                              7. Click OK.

                                                                                              The custom name, Job code displays along with the original name, Work Order in a comma-separated format for each language.

                                                                                                Holidays

                                                                                                There may be certain holidays when it would not be appropriate to send messages to customers. Use the Holidays section within Notifications to set up the dates where certain outgoing messages will be blocked.

                                                                                                Access to the Holidays window is controlled by the Notifications visibility profile permission. You must set this permission for each user type that you want to manage holidays. If the action is not configured for the user type or if no visibility is defined, Holidays will not be visible to the user. If you select ReadOnly, Holidays is placed into a view only mode. If you select Read/Write for this setting, the user can manage Holidays

                                                                                                  Add a Holiday

                                                                                                  There may be certain holidays on which it would not be appropriate to send messages to customers. Use the Holidays section of the Company Settings to set up the dates where certain outgoing messages will be blocked.

                                                                                                  1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                                  2. In the Subsystems and Integrations section, click Notifications.

                                                                                                  3. Click Holidays.

                                                                                                    The Holidays screen appears.

                                                                                                  4. Click Add new.

                                                                                                    The Add holiday window opens.

                                                                                                  5. Enter the name of the holiday in the Add holiday box.

                                                                                                  6. Select the status from the Status drop-down menu.

                                                                                                  7. Select the date on which the holiday falls.

                                                                                                  8. Click Add.

                                                                                                    The holiday appears in the list.

                                                                                                    Delete, Activate, or Deactivate a Holiday

                                                                                                    There may be certain holidays on which it would not be appropriate to send messages to customers. Use the Holidays section of the Company Settings to set up the dates where certain outgoing messages will be blocked.

                                                                                                    1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                                    2. In the Subsystems and Integrations section, click Notifications.

                                                                                                    3. Click Holidays.

                                                                                                      The Holidays screen appears.

                                                                                                    4. Select the check box next to holiday that you want to delete or deactivate.

                                                                                                    5. Click Delete, Activate, or Deactivate.

                                                                                                    6. Click OK.

                                                                                                      The updated holiday list is displayed. Deactivated holidays are not included for selection.

                                                                                                      Inventory Types

                                                                                                      Inventory Type helps you distinguish between serialized and non-serialized inventory.

                                                                                                      Access to the Inventory Type window is controlled by the Inventory Types visibility profile permission. You must set this permission for each user type that you want to manage Inventory Types. If the action is not configured for the user type or if no visibility is defined, Inventory Types will not be visible to the user. If you select ReadOnly, Inventory Types is placed into a view only mode. If you select Read/Write for this setting, the user can manage Inventory Types.

                                                                                                        Add an Inventory Type

                                                                                                        You can create serialized inventory and non-serialized inventory types.

                                                                                                        1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                                        2. In the Resources, Activities and Inventories section, click Inventory Types.

                                                                                                        3. Click Add new.

                                                                                                          The Add inventory type dialog appears.

                                                                                                        4. Complete the following fields:

                                                                                                          Field Description
                                                                                                          Label Enter a unique identifier for this inventory type.
                                                                                                          Active Select this check box to make the inventory type available in drop-down menus.
                                                                                                          Non Serialized Select this check box if the inventory type is non-serialized.
                                                                                                          Supports required inventory Select this check box to make the inventory type required for selected activities.
                                                                                                          Model Property If desired, select additional characteristics for this inventory type from the drop-down list.
                                                                                                          Name Enter a name for this inventory type in each appropriate language field.
                                                                                                          Unit of measurement If this inventory type is non-serialized, enter a unit of measure. Use a language and a unit of measure appropriate for the country in which this inventory type will be used.
                                                                                                        5. Click Save.

                                                                                                          Activate or Deactivate an Inventory Type

                                                                                                          Inventory Type helps you distinguish between serialized and non-serialized inventory.

                                                                                                          1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                                          2. Select Inventory Types from the Resources, Activities and Inventories section of the menu.

                                                                                                          3. Select the check box next to inventory type(s) that you want to activate or deactivate.

                                                                                                          4. Click Activate or Deactivate.

                                                                                                          5. Click OK.

                                                                                                            Link Templates

                                                                                                            Link Templates are link profiles containing link type, time between activities constraints, scheduling constraints, and assignment constraints. Links between the activities are created with the help of Link Templates.

                                                                                                            Linked activities ensure scheduling and detailed planning for complicated, multi-step tasks, which may potentially involve different resource types, different times, and time constraints. Configuring all these link constraints in a multi-step task allows our routing engine to assign and schedule activities while meeting all of the requirements.

                                                                                                            The Link Templates screen includes the list of link types that exist in the system. You can edit existing links and add new ones. Note that existing activity link types cannot be removed from the system but can only be deactivated.

                                                                                                            Access to the Link Templates window is controlled by the Link Templates visibility profile permission. You must set this permission for each user type that you want to manage Link Templates. If the action is not configured for the user type or if no visibility is defined, Link Templates will not be visible to the user. If you select ReadOnly, Link Templates is placed into a view only mode. If you select Read/Write for this setting, the user can manage Link Templates.

                                                                                                              Add a Link Template

                                                                                                              Link Templates are link profiles containing link type, time between activities constraints, scheduling constraints, and assignment constraints. Links between the activities are created with the help of Link Templates.

                                                                                                              1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                                              2. In the General section, click Link Templates.

                                                                                                              3. Click Add Link Template.

                                                                                                                The New Link Template dialog is displayed.

                                                                                                              4. Select the appropriate icon that represents the way in which you want to link activities.

                                                                                                                The fields below the icons change based on your selection.

                                                                                                              5. Complete the following fields:

                                                                                                                Field Description
                                                                                                                Minimum interval Minimum time interval between activities. Select one of the options:
                                                                                                                • Adjustable: The time interval is adjustable with the specified default value.

                                                                                                                • Non-adjustable: The time interval is non-adjustable with the specified predefined value.

                                                                                                                Maximum interval Maximum time interval between activities. Select one of the options:
                                                                                                                • Adjustable: The time interval is adjustable with the specified default value.

                                                                                                                • Non-adjustable: The time interval is non-adjustable with the specified predefined value.

                                                                                                                • Unlimited: The time interval is unlimited, with no restrictions.

                                                                                                                Assignment constraints Whether there are any constraints in assigning the activities to resources. Click Different resources if the linked activities can be performed by different resources. Click Same resource if the linked activities must be performed by the same resource.
                                                                                                                Scheduling constraints Whether there are any constraints in scheduling the activities. Click Different days if the linked activities can be performed on different days. Click Same day if the linked activities must be performed on the same day.
                                                                                                                Link for the 1st activity Specifies translations for the first activity. English is set as a default language, unless other languages are specified. You must also specify the label for this link which will be used by external systems.
                                                                                                                Link for the 2nd activity Specifies translations for the second activity. English is set as a default language, unless other languages are specified. You must also specify the label for this link which will be used by external systems.
                                                                                                                Label A unique identifier for this Link template.
                                                                                                                Status Whether this activity link type is available for selection as an option in the Add link pop-up window.

                                                                                                                Login Policies

                                                                                                                Login Policies determine the authentication method and options for users to access the application.

                                                                                                                There are five types of authentication methods:
                                                                                                                • Internal - The internal authentication method (BasicHTTP) is a good solution for small companies with relatively few user credentials, which can be stored directly in the application database.

                                                                                                                • LDAP – The LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) authentication method is similar to the internal method, the only difference being that the users' credentials are stored outside Oracle Field Service Cloud in an external LDAP server. This method can be used by companies which prefer to store their user data in an external server to increase security. When LDAP authentication is used, the user enters their credentials into Oracle Field Service Cloud which then passes them to the LDAP server for verification. To enable LDAP authentication, a software that supports LDAP v3 must be installed and configured on the customer's back-end server. Examples of such software are: Active Directory, OpenLDAP.

                                                                                                                • SAML – The SAML (Security Assertion Mark-Up Language) authentication method is an SSO method involving authentication data exchange between the user, the service provider (SP) and the identity provider (IdP). The user wishing to access the services of the service provider has to pass the authentication by the identity provider which asserts the user's identity to the service provider. The user's data is stored with the identity provider and is verified by the user's credentials. If the user authentication is successful, the service provider verifies the user's login policy and grants access to the application. One user can be associated with only one login policy and, therefore, its data can be stored with only one identity provider. The application supports SAML 2.0 protocol, therefore, you can use any SAML 2.0 identity provider. The identity provider details must be used in configuring the SAML Login Policy.

                                                                                                                  IDCS for Web SSO: You can use Oracle Identity Cloud Service (IDCS) as an identity provider for web SSO. This option helps customers store user credentials in a different store instead of Oracle Field Service Cloud. This option is part of the SAML authentication option, and you can upload the metadata as an XML file.

                                                                                                                • OpenID Connect - With the OpenID Connect authentication method the user uses their account created with an OpenID Connect Identity Provider to login to any website supporting OpenID Connect authentication. The user registers their OpenID Connect URL with the OpenID Provider which becomes the user's identifier. OpenID Connect can be a method of choice for companies preferring cloud data storage and using the same credentials to access multiple websites.

                                                                                                                Generally, the authentication method used depends on the company's business principles and requirements. In most cases, a company uses one authentication method, although, use of several authentication methods within the same company is technically possible.

                                                                                                                  Add a Login Policy

                                                                                                                  Login policies determine the authentication method and options for users to access Oracle Field Service Cloud. The application includes a default login policy, however, you can add multiple policies with multiple authentication methods.

                                                                                                                  1. Click Company name > Configuration

                                                                                                                    The Add Policy dialog appears.

                                                                                                                  2. In the Users and Security section, click Login Policies.

                                                                                                                  3. Click Add new.

                                                                                                                    The Add Policy dialog appears.

                                                                                                                  4. Complete the following fields:

                                                                                                                    Field Description
                                                                                                                    Label A unique identifier label. For SAML login policy, enter only alphabets, numbers, and undersrores ( _ ).
                                                                                                                    Policy name A name assigned to this policy. Enter the name in English and in all the languages that are active in the application.
                                                                                                                    Authenticate using The type of authentication method used for this login policy.
                                                                                                                    The following fields are displayed for Internal authentication method:
                                                                                                                    Max login attempts The number of invalid login attempts after which the user is blocked. When this field is set to 0 (zero), the feature is disabled. However, disabling this feature is not recommended for security reasons.
                                                                                                                    Login block timer The number of minutes during which the user remains blocked after reaching the maximum number of invalid login attempts.
                                                                                                                    Force password change after Number of days after which the user must change their password to access the application. When this field is set to 0 (zero), the feature is disabled.
                                                                                                                    Note: If the customer's LDAP server allows setting the period of forced password change, it is recommended that the period set in the application is shorter than the one set on the LDAP server. This way, the password changes initiated by the application occur earlier than those initiated by the LDAP server which ensures correct and reliable performance.
                                                                                                                    User activity relogin time The duration of the idle time after which the user is prompted to re-enter the password upon an attempt of any action in the application.
                                                                                                                    Relogin timeout The period after which the user is prompted to re-enter the password regardless of whether the user was active or not.
                                                                                                                    Max sessions The maximum number of simultaneous sessions allowed to the user.
                                                                                                                    Min password length The minimum number of characters in the password.
                                                                                                                    Password must contain letters Whether the password must contain alphabets.
                                                                                                                    Password must contain digits Whether the password must contain numbers.
                                                                                                                    Password must contain special symbols Whether the password must contain special characters and symbols.
                                                                                                                    Password must not contain personal details Whether the password must not contain personal details such as the user’s first name or last name.
                                                                                                                    Password must differ from old password Whether the password must be different from a previous password.
                                                                                                                    Disable weak password hash When selected, authentication based on SHA-256 hash function is used. When cleared, authentication based on MD5 is used.
                                                                                                                    Note: It is recommended that you select this check box and use SHA-256 based authentication.
                                                                                                                    Allow access only for certain IP addresses Whether you want to restrict access to specific IP addresses. By default, a login policy is created without any restrictions to the IP addresses from which the user may log in. Select the check box to enable the restriction. When this check box selected, the Allowed IP address list field appears, where you can enter the IP addresses that can access the application.
                                                                                                                    The following fields are displayed for the LDAP authentication method, along with the fields listed earlier:
                                                                                                                    LDAP server URL The actual host name or IP address of the LDAP server.
                                                                                                                    LDAP DN pattern If the LDAP server is MS Active Directory check box is selected, this field contains the part of the UPN (User Principal Name) common among the users. In this case the LDAP DN pattern must always contain the UPN pattern. UPN (User Principal Name) is a string of characters used to represent a resource available in Active Directory. It should be used when communicating with MS Active Directory servers. An example of this field value is %s@test.corp, where %s is a special placeholder to be substituted with the user's login. If the LDAP server is MS Active Directory check box is not selected, this field contains the common path to the LDAP tree for the users, their DN pattern. DN (Distinguished Name) is a string of characters used to represent a resource available in the LDAP directory. An example of this field value is cn=%s,dc=example,dc=com, where %s is a special placeholder to be substituted with the user's login in the application.
                                                                                                                    LDAP server is MS Active Directory Whether the LDAP server is a MS Active Directory.
                                                                                                                    The following fields are displayed for the SAML authentication method:
                                                                                                                    Specify SAML IdP The way in which you want to select the SAML identity provider. The options are:
                                                                                                                    • Upload metadata XML

                                                                                                                    • Specify metadata URL

                                                                                                                    • Oracle IDCS

                                                                                                                    • Manual populate

                                                                                                                    IdP Metadata XML This field is displayed if you select Upload metadata XML in the Specify SAML IdP field. Click Upload to upload the XML file that contains the metadata details for the identity provider. If the uploaded file is incomplete, or does not contain the details in the proper format, the message, Cannot download metadata from the specified XML: XML parser error is displayed. Contact your Identity Service Provider to get this metadata XML. Ensure that the XML includes or conforms to the following information:
                                                                                                                    • Metadata XML must be in accordance with SAML 2.0 specifications.

                                                                                                                    • The file contains "SAML Issuer" (parameter "entityID" of the node "EntityDescriptor").

                                                                                                                    • The file provides identity provider certificate (nodes "md:EntityDescriptor/md:IDPSSODescriptor/KeyDescriptor/KeyInfo/X509Data/X509Certificate/").

                                                                                                                    IdP Metadata URL This field is displayed if you select Specify metadata URL in the Specify SAML IdP field. Type the URL from which you want to take the SAML metadata details for the identity provider. If the URL is unresolved, the message, Cannot download metadata from the specified URL: no route to host is displayed.
                                                                                                                    IDCS Metadata XML This field is displayed if you select Oracle IDCS in the Specify SAML IdP field. Click Upload to upload the XML file that contains the metadata details for Oracle IDCS. Contact your implementation consultant for more details on Oracle IDCS.
                                                                                                                    OFSC Metadata XML The link to download the OFSC metadata XML. You must pair your identity provider with Oracle Field Service Cloud. Use the downloaded XML file to register Oracle Field Service Cloud with your identity provider.
                                                                                                                    Max sessions The maximum number of simultaneous sessions allowed to the user.
                                                                                                                    SAML issuer Used to identify asserts from Identity provider (IdP). It can be any string provided by IdP, not only URL. It is used for IdP and Service provider (SP) initiated connections.
                                                                                                                    SAML identity provider certificate IdP public key used to sign requests.
                                                                                                                    SAML identity provider login URL IdP URL to redirect to for login. It is needed only for SP initiated logins.
                                                                                                                    SAML identity provider logout URL IdP URL to redirect to for logout. It is needed only for SP initiated logins.
                                                                                                                    SAML attribute containing username The SAML assertion attribute name where IdP must store the user name (login name for Oracle Field Service Cloud). Example:
                                                                                                                    [saml:Attribute Name="uid" NameFormat="urn:oasis:names:tc:SAML:2.0:attrnameformat:
                                                                                                                    basic"]
                                                                                                                    [saml:AttributeValue xsi:type="xs:string"]dispatcher[/saml:AttributeValue]
                                                                                                                    [/saml:Attribute]
                                                                                                                    
                                                                                                                    If it is empty then Oracle Field Service Cloud gets the user name from the Name Identifier element of Subject statement. Example:
                                                                                                                    [saml:Subject]
                                                                                                                    [saml:NameID
                                                                                                                    SPNameQualifier="https://sp.com/sp/module.php/ saml/sp/metadata.php/ default-sp"
                                                                                                                    Format="urn:oasis:names:tc:SAML:2.0:nameidformat:
                                                                                                                    persistent"]dispatcher[/saml:NameID]
                                                                                                                    [/saml:Subject]
                                                                                                                    Signature hashing algorithm The security-hashing algorithm that is used to authenticate users through a SAML login policy. The option you select determines the security algorithm that is applied to OFSC Metadata, which is used to pair your identity provider with Oracle Field Service Cloud. We recommend that you use "SHA-256".
                                                                                                                    The following fields are displayed for the OpenID authentication method:
                                                                                                                    Max sessions The maximum number of simultaneous sessions allowed to the user.
                                                                                                                    OpenId identity provider login URL The Identity Provider URL to start authentication.
                                                                                                                    OpenId logout URL URL to which the user is redirected after logout. It may be the URL for logout from the Identity Provider.
                                                                                                                    OpenId attribute containing username The name of the OpenId attribute where the Identity Provider should store the user's name (login name for Oracle Field Service Cloud). Example:

                                                                                                                    http://axschema.org/contact/email (This attribute returns the user's email). The attribute must have a unique value for each user.

                                                                                                                    The following fields are displayed for the Open ID Connect authentication method:
                                                                                                                    Max sessions The maximum number of simultaneous sessions allowed to the user.
                                                                                                                    OpenId Connect identity provider login URL The Identity Provider URL to start authentication.
                                                                                                                    OpenId Connect logout URL URL to which the user is redirected after logout. It may be the URL for logout from the Identity Provider.
                                                                                                                    OpenId Connect attribute containing username The name of the OpenId attribute where the Identity Provider must store the user's name (login name for Oracle Field Service Cloud). Example:

                                                                                                                    http://axschema.org/contact/email (This attribute returns the user's email). The attribute must have a unique value for each user.

                                                                                                                    OpenId Connect client ID The value of the field containing data from registered project (for example, Client ID).
                                                                                                                    OpenId Connect client secert The value of the field containing data from registered project (for example, Client Secret).

                                                                                                                  Sample Metadata XML File

                                                                                                                  Sample metadata XML file for SAML identity provider:
                                                                                                                  <?xml version="1.0"?>
                                                                                                                  <md:EntityDescriptor xmlns:md="urn:oasis:names:tc:SAML:2.0:metadata" xmlns:ds="http://www.w3.org/2000/09/xmldsig#" entityID="https://idp-saml.ua3.int/simplesaml/saml2/idp/metadata.php">
                                                                                                                    <md:IDPSSODescriptor protocolSupportEnumeration="urn:oasis:names:tc:SAML:2.0:protocol">
                                                                                                                      <md:KeyDescriptor use="signing">
                                                                                                                        <ds:KeyInfo xmlns:ds="http://www.w3.org/2000/09/xmldsig#">
                                                                                                                          <ds:X509Data>
                                                                                                                            <ds:X509Certificate>MIID7TCCAtWgAwIBAgIJANn3qP9lF7M3MA0GCSqGSIb3DQEBCwUAMIGMMQswCQYDVQQGEwJVQTEXMBUGA1UE
                                                                                                                  		  CAwOS2hhcmtpdiBSZWdpb24xEDAOBgNVBAcMB0toYXJrb3YxDzANBgNVBAoMBk9yYWNsZTEYMBYGA1UEAwwPc3RzeWJvdi12bTEudWEzMScw
                                                                                                                  		  JQYJKoZIhvcNAQkBFhhzZXJnaWkudHN5Ym92QG9yYWNsZS5jb20wHhcNMTUxMjI1MTIyMjU5WhcNMjUxMjI0MTIyMjU5WjCBjDELMAkGA1UE
                                                                                                                  		  BhMCVUExFzAVBgNVBAgMDktoYXJraXYgUmVnaW9uMRAwDgYDVQQHDAdLaGFya292MQ8wDQYDVQQKDAZPcmFjbGUxGDAWBgNVBAMMD3N0c3lib
                                                                                                                  		  3Ytdm0xLnVhMzEnMCUGCSqGSIb3DQEJARYYc2VyZ2lpLnRzeWJvdkBvcmFjbGUuY29tMIIBIjANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQEFAAOCAQ8AMIIBCgKCA
                                                                                                                  		  QEAw4OFwuUNjn6xxb/OuAnmQA6mCWPY2hKMoOz0cAajUHjNZZMwGnuEeUyPtEcULfz2MYo1yKQLxVj3pY0HTIQAzpY8o+xCqJFQmdMiakb
                                                                                                                  		  PFHlh4z/qqiS5jHng6JCeUpCIxeiTG9JXVwF1ErBEZbwZYjVxa6S+0grVkS3YxuH4uTyqxskuGnHK/AviTHLBrLfSrbFKYuQUrXyy6X22wpzo
                                                                                                                  		  bQ3Z+4bhEE8SXQtVbQdy7K0MKWYopNhX05SMTv7yMfUGp8EkGNyJ5Km8AuQt6ZCbVao6cHL2hSujQiN6aMjKbdzHeA1QEicppnnoG/Zefyi/
                                                                                                                  		  okWdlLAaLjcpYrjUSWQJZQIDAQABo1AwTjAdBgNVHQ4EFgQUIKa0zeXmAJsCuNhJjhU0o7KiQgYwHwYDVR0jBBgwFoAUIKa0zeXmAJsCuNhJj
                                                                                                                  		  hU0o7KiQgYwDAYDVR0TBAUwAwEB/zANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQsFAAOCAQEAJawU5WRXqkW4emm+djpJAxZ0076qPgEsaaog6ng4MLAlU7RmfIY/
                                                                                                                  		  l0VhXQegvhIBfG4OfduuzGaqd9y4IsQZFJ0yuotl96iEVcqg7hJ1LEY6UT6u6dZyGj1a9I6IlwJm/9CXFZHuVqGJkMfQZ4gaunE4c5gjbQA5/
                                                                                                                  		  +PEJwPorKn48w8bojymV8hriqzrmaP8eQNuZUJsJdnKENOE5/asGyj+R2YfP6bmlOX3q0ozLcyJbXeZ6IvDFdRiDH5wO4JqW/ujvdvC553y
                                                                                                                  		  CO3xxsorB4xCupuHu/c7vkzNpaKjYdmGRkqhEqBcCqYSxdwIFc1xhOwYPWKJzgn7pGQsT7yNJg==</ds:X509Certificate>
                                                                                                                          </ds:X509Data>
                                                                                                                        </ds:KeyInfo>
                                                                                                                      </md:KeyDescriptor>
                                                                                                                      <md:KeyDescriptor use="encryption">
                                                                                                                        <ds:KeyInfo xmlns:ds="http://www.w3.org/2000/09/xmldsig#">
                                                                                                                          <ds:X509Data>
                                                                                                                            <ds:X509Certificate>MIID7TCCAtWgAwIBAgIJANn3qP9lF7M3MA0GCSqGSIb3DQEBCwUAMIGMMQswCQYDVQQGEwJVQTEXMBUGA1
                                                                                                                  		  UECAwOS2hhcmtpdiBSZWdpb24xEDAOBgNVBAcMB0toYXJrb3YxDzANBgNVBAoMBk9yYWNsZTEYMBYGA1UEAwwPc3RzeWJvdi12bTEud
                                                                                                                  		  WEzMScwJQYJKoZIhvcNAQkBFhhzZXJnaWkudHN5Ym92QG9yYWNsZS5jb20wHhcNMTUxMjI1MTIyMjU5WhcNMjUxMjI0MTIyMjU5WjCB
                                                                                                                  		  jDELMAkGA1UEBhMCVUExFzAVBgNVBAgMDktoYXJraXYgUmVnaW9uMRAwDgYDVQQHDAdLaGFya292MQ8wDQYDVQQKDAZPcmFjbGUxGDA
                                                                                                                  		  WBgNVBAMMD3N0c3lib3Ytdm0xLnVhMzEnMCUGCSqGSIb3DQEJARYYc2VyZ2lpLnRzeWJvdkBvcmFjbGUuY29tMIIBIjANBgkqhkiG9w0B
                                                                                                                  		  AQEFAAOCAQ8AMIIBCgKCAQEAw4OFwuUNjn6xxb/OuAnmQA6mCWPY2hKMoOz0cAajUHjNZZMwGnuEeUyPtEcULfz2MYo1yKQLxVj3pY0HT
                                                                                                                  		  IQAzpY8o+xCqJFQmdMiakbPFHlh4z/qqiS5jHng6JCeUpCIxeiTG9JXVwF1ErBEZbwZYjVxa6S+0grVkS3YxuH4uTyqxskuGnHK/
                                                                                                                  		  AviTHLBrLfSrbFKYuQUrXyy6X22wpzobQ3Z+4bhEE8SXQtVbQdy7K0MKWYopNhX05SMTv7yMfUGp8EkGNyJ5Km8AuQt6ZCbVao6cHL2h
                                                                                                                  		  SujQiN6aMjKbdzHeA1QEicppnnoG/Zefyi/okWdlLAaLjcpYrjUSWQJZQIDAQABo1AwTjAdBgNVHQ4EFgQUIKa0zeXmAJsCuNhJjhU0o
                                                                                                                  		  7KiQgYwHwYDVR0jBBgwFoAUIKa0zeXmAJsCuNhJjhU0o7KiQgYwDAYDVR0TBAUwAwEB/zANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQsFAAOCAQEAJawU5WRXq
                                                                                                                  		  kW4emm+djpJAxZ0076qPgEsaaog6ng4MLAlU7RmfIY/l0VhXQegvhIBfG4OfduuzGaqd9y4IsQZFJ0yuotl96iEVcqg7hJ1LEY6UT6u6d
                                                                                                                  		  ZyGj1a9I6IlwJm/9CXFZHuVqGJkMfQZ4gaunE4c5gjbQA5/+PEJwPorKn48w8bojymV8hriqzrmaP8eQNuZUJsJdnKENOE5/
                                                                                                                  		  asGyj+R2YfP6bmlOX3q0ozLcyJbXeZ6IvDFdRiDH5wO4JqW/ujvdvC553yCO3xxsorB4xCupuHu/c7vkzNpaKjYdmGRkqhEqBcCqYSxd
                                                                                                                  		  wIFc1xhOwYPWKJzgn7pGQsT7yNJg==</ds:X509Certificate>
                                                                                                                          </ds:X509Data>
                                                                                                                        </ds:KeyInfo>
                                                                                                                      </md:KeyDescriptor>
                                                                                                                      <md:SingleLogoutService Binding="urn:oasis:names:tc:SAML:2.0:bindings:HTTP-Redirect" Location="https://idp-saml.ua3.int/simplesaml/saml2/idp/SingleLogoutService.php"/>
                                                                                                                      <md:NameIDFormat>urn:oasis:names:tc:SAML:2.0:nameid-format:transient</md:NameIDFormat>
                                                                                                                      <md:SingleSignOnService Binding="urn:oasis:names:tc:SAML:2.0:bindings:HTTP-Redirect" Location="https://idp-saml.ua3.int/simplesaml/saml2/idp/SSOService.php"/>
                                                                                                                    </md:IDPSSODescriptor>
                                                                                                                    <md:ContactPerson contactType="technical">
                                                                                                                      <md:SurName>Administrator</md:SurName>
                                                                                                                      <md:EmailAddress>name@email.com</md:EmailAddress>
                                                                                                                    </md:ContactPerson>
                                                                                                                  </md:EntityDescriptor>
                                                                                                                  

                                                                                                                    About Organizations

                                                                                                                    An organization is an entity comprising multiple people, tools, and vehicles that collectively operate as a unit toward a common goal. In other words, an organization is either a main company, a subdivision (Line of Business of an organization), or a third-party company that has a contract with the main company. An organization can have buckets, organization units, field resources, tools or vehicle associations.

                                                                                                                    An Organization can have buckets, organization units (Org Units), field resources, tools or vehicle associations. You must create an organization before adding any type of resource. There is one default organization and you can create additional organizations (in-house and contractor) to meet your operational needs. For example, if XYZ Inc., is the main organization, XYZ East Coast and XYZ West Coast could be subdivisions. The resources that are directly employed with the organization are known as in-house resources. The resources that are employed by a third-party company that subcontracts work are known as contractors. It is recommended that you create an organization for each contractor company. If the main organization cannot directly assign activities to contractor resources for legal reasons, it can assign activities to a bucket that contains contractors. Further, a field resource, tool or vehicle will automatically inherit the parent’s Organization, while a bucket or organization unit can be changed to any defined Organization in the system.

                                                                                                                      Create, Edit, or Delete Organizations

                                                                                                                      An Organization is either a main company, a subdivision (Line of Business of an Organization), or a third-party company that has a contract with the main company. An Organization can have buckets, Organization units, field resources, tools or vehicle associations. You can create, edit, or delete Organizations.

                                                                                                                      1. Click Configuration > Organization.

                                                                                                                        The Organizations screen appears.
                                                                                                                      2. Click Add New.

                                                                                                                        The Add Organization dialog appears.
                                                                                                                      3. Enter the name of the Organization in the Name field. Enter the names in the corresponding language fields for languages other than English.

                                                                                                                      4. Enter a label for the Organization in the Label field.

                                                                                                                        This label will be used as the Organization identifier in APIs.
                                                                                                                      5. Select the type of Organization from the Type drop-down list.

                                                                                                                        The Organization type can be in-house or contractor.
                                                                                                                      6. Click OK.

                                                                                                                        The Organization is added to the list of Organizations.
                                                                                                                      7. To edit an Organization, click the Organization on the Organizations screen.

                                                                                                                        The Edit Organization screen appears. Edit as required and click Submit.
                                                                                                                      8. To delete an Organization, click Remove on the Organizations screen.

                                                                                                                        You can remove only those Organizations that do not have field resources, tools, or vehicles assigned to them.

                                                                                                                        Message Scenarios

                                                                                                                        Create a Message Scenario

                                                                                                                        A message scenario is a set of rules that specify how to process a message to a system or customers when a Launch condition occurs. A launch condition is triggered by a predefined event in the system, for example, when a reminder notification should be sent to a customer 60 minutes prior to a resource’s estimated arrival time.

                                                                                                                        When you want to use Message Scenarios for time-based notifications (for example, notifications to customers) the recommendation is to use Reminders, Alerts, or Visit selections in the Launch Conditions. For other Launch Conditions (for example, Route, Activity, Inventory, and Service Requests) the recommendation is to use the Core API/Events REST API for integration with Oracle Field Service Cloud.

                                                                                                                        A Message Scenario consists of one or more scenario steps, which determine message content, recipients, delivery channels, and business rules. While each Message Scenario has at least one start step, you can configure multiple inner steps to execute different actions based on the results of the preceding steps. The intent is to ensure that the right people or systems are receiving expected notifications while considering all potential circumstances.

                                                                                                                        Note: Because the messages go to your customers, you must test them carefully and thoroughly to ensure that the launch conditions, scenarios, steps, and channels are set up correctly. For more information about Launch conditions warnings and notes, Scenario Steps elements, Channel errors, Supported variables within the body of the message, refer to Oracle Field Service Cloud Message Scenario Configuration Guide.

                                                                                                                        To create a message scenario, for example, Route Not Activated:

                                                                                                                        1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                                                        2. Click Message Scenarios in the Subsystems And Integrations section.

                                                                                                                          The Message Scenarios screen displays.

                                                                                                                        3. Click the Plus icon in the left pane.

                                                                                                                          The Add Message Scenario screen displays.

                                                                                                                        4. Enter Route Not Activated in the Name field.

                                                                                                                        5. Select a date from the Active From field.

                                                                                                                        6. Click OK.

                                                                                                                          The Route Not Activated message scenario displays on the left pane.

                                                                                                                          Define the Settings for a Scenario Step Using the Settings Tab

                                                                                                                          The Settings tab enables you to define the general settings for a message step which includes the following settings:

                                                                                                                          • Step Info section: Define the type of the message step, intended recipient, and the delivery method.

                                                                                                                          • Notification Time section: Define when to send the message (for example, day of event or for how many days) and the time interval when the messages are sent.

                                                                                                                          Field Description
                                                                                                                          Step Info section
                                                                                                                          Name Enter the name of the step that displays in the Scenario steps section.
                                                                                                                          Type Select the type of step, Start or Inner. Start steps are the first steps that occur when a scenario is initiated. An inner step is run after a preceding step is completed.
                                                                                                                          Delivery Channel Select the message agent for delivering the message. Options: Email, Set Property, user-defined channel, Collaboration.
                                                                                                                          Note: If you select collaboration as the delivery channel, see Use Collaboration as a Delivery Channel
                                                                                                                          Recipient The options available varies based on the selected delivery channel (Email, Set Property, user-defined channel, or Collaboration).

                                                                                                                          Select the intended recipient (Customer, Resource, Dispatcher, or use static address) of the message.

                                                                                                                          By default, the recipient address is fetched from the activity or resource fields for the options, Customer, Resource, or Dispatcher.

                                                                                                                          However, if you select Use static address, then you must enter a static recipient address in the format, notify@etadirect.com.
                                                                                                                          Note: The following drop-down lists display based on the selections made in the Recipient and Delivery Channel drop-down lists.
                                                                                                                          Customer Notification Time Select the time for notifying customers. For example, ETA, Service window, or Delivery window.
                                                                                                                          Reply Address Enter the e-mail address (for example, notify@etadirect.com) for sending notifications when you select Email as the Delivery channel and Customer, Dispatcher, or Resource as the Recipient.
                                                                                                                          Time Zone and Language Select the time zone and language for the email content when you select Email as the Delivery channel and use static address as the Recipient.
                                                                                                                          Static address Enter the email address or distribution group to which you want to send emails when you select Email as the Delivery channel and use static address as the Recipient.
                                                                                                                          Email address source Refers to the resource property that contains e-mail information when Dispatcher or Resource is selected as a recipient or refers to the user-defined property that contains e-mail information when Customer is selected as a recipient.
                                                                                                                          Notification time section
                                                                                                                          Sending time Select one of following options:
                                                                                                                          • Day of event

                                                                                                                          • Time of event

                                                                                                                          • Day of route

                                                                                                                          For example, if you select Day of event, select +, and enter 2 in the Days field, then the messages are sent after two days from the Day of event.

                                                                                                                          from Select the starting time for the messages.

                                                                                                                          For example, if you select 8 AM from the drop-down list, then the messages are sent from 8 AM.

                                                                                                                          Available when either Day of event or Day of route is selected in the Sending time field.

                                                                                                                          Sending will time out in Specify the interval in hours and minutes. The messages are sent during the specified interval.
                                                                                                                          Number of Attempts On ‘failed’ status Indicates the maximum number of resend attempts. For example, if you enter 3 in the Interval field and 10 in the Minutes field, then the message is resent for 3 times after every 10 minutes.
                                                                                                                          Number of Attempts On ‘sent’ status

                                                                                                                          Available only for External Systems.

                                                                                                                          Indicates the maximum number of attempts to resend the notification status received.

                                                                                                                          For example, if you enter 3 in the Interval field and 10 in the Minutes field, then the notification status is resent for 3 times after every 10 minutes.

                                                                                                                          Sending delay Specify the time in minutes if you want some time to elapse after an event.

                                                                                                                          For example, for Post Appointment Survey messages, you want to ensure that the resource leaves the premises before the customer receives the survey.

                                                                                                                          Block messages for specific days Select the days for which you do not want to send messages.
                                                                                                                          Block messages for holidays Select the option, if you do not want to send messages during holidays. You must set up holidays using Configuration, Holidays.
                                                                                                                          Blocked messages sending Indicates the number of days before the holiday. For example, if you select 2, then the messages are stopped before two days.

                                                                                                                          For our example, enter the following details:

                                                                                                                          1. Click Add New in the Scenario steps section.

                                                                                                                            The Add scenario step screen displays.

                                                                                                                          2. Enter Start test in the Name field.

                                                                                                                          3. Select Start from the Type drop-down list.

                                                                                                                          4. Select Email from the Delivery Channel drop-down list.

                                                                                                                          5. Select day of event and + from the Sending time drop-down list.

                                                                                                                          6. Enter 2 in the days field.

                                                                                                                          7. Enter 5 in the hours field and 30 in the minutes field in the Sending will time out in field.

                                                                                                                          8. Select Service Window from the Customer notification time drop-down list.

                                                                                                                          9. Click Add.

                                                                                                                            The Start test message step displays in the Scenario steps section. The Scenario steps section also displays other details such as sending time, the number of messages that are being sent today, and a graph of the progress. The graph and the queue details are hidden if the screen size is not enough to display the details.

                                                                                                                          Define the Message Content Using the Patterns Tab

                                                                                                                          The Patterns tab defines the content of the message that you want to send to your customers or systems. You can use variables within the body of the message to substitute the property value within the content of the message.

                                                                                                                          Based on the delivery channel, the template for the message differs as follows:
                                                                                                                          • If the selected Delivery Channel is Email or External System, then the template for the message is defined using the Subject and Body fields.

                                                                                                                          • If the selected Delivery Channel is Set Property, then the template for the message is defined using the property field and property value.

                                                                                                                          For example, assume that Cancellation Reason property is associated with the entity, Activity. When a customer cancels an activity, you need to set the Cancellation Reason property field for the activity to the value, 14. Using the Set Property delivery channel, you can use the Cancellation Reason property in the Subject field and define the required value in the Body field. So when the step is run, the application changes the value in the Cancellation Reason property to 14.

                                                                                                                          Also, you can determine when you want to generate the content of the message using the Generate content on message creation or Generate content on message sending options. For example, assume that you want to send a Post Appointment Survey message to your customer and the Sending delay field in the Settings tab is set to 40 minutes. Assume that the content of the Post Appointment Survey message has three activity property fields.

                                                                                                                          Although the message is created when the message step is run, the property values may change after 40 minutes. Hence, select the Generate content on message sending option so that you receive the latest changes. For example, if you want to display the customer address in the content of the message, enter the label name of the property field using { }. For example, {caddress}.

                                                                                                                          1. Select the Start test message step from the Scenario steps section.

                                                                                                                          2. Select the Patterns tab.

                                                                                                                          3. Enter test start in the Subject field.

                                                                                                                          4. Enter start test activity started at {caddress} in the Body field.

                                                                                                                          5. Select Generate content on message sending option and click Update.

                                                                                                                            Handle Conditions Using the Next Steps Tab

                                                                                                                            The Next Steps tab identifies the relation between different steps of a scenario and defines the conditions for the execution of subsequent steps.

                                                                                                                            For example, assume that the start step (that is, the start test activity) fails due to some reason and you want to inform a resource in the Helpdesk department that the activity has failed. To handle the above condition, you must create an inner step and define the message that you want to send to the Helpdesk department.
                                                                                                                            Note: By default, the Next Step drop-down list in the Start test, Next Steps tab is empty. Since the inner step handles a specific condition when the Start Step fails, it is required to create an inner step and link the Start step with the Inner step.
                                                                                                                            To create an inner step, follow the steps in the Define the settings for a scenario step using the Settings tab section, but modify the following settings:
                                                                                                                            • Enter test inner in the Name field, select Inner, Resource, and Email from the Type, Recipient, and Delivery Channel drop-down lists.

                                                                                                                            • Enter the email address of the Helpdesk department in the Reply address field.

                                                                                                                            • Select the Patterns tab and enter the message that you want to send in the Subject and Body fields.

                                                                                                                            For our example, let us configure the Start step so that when the Start step fails, the inner step (that is, test inner) runs and sends the failure message to the Helpdesk department.

                                                                                                                            1. Select the Start test message step from the Scenario steps section.

                                                                                                                            2. Select the Next Steps tab.

                                                                                                                            3. Select Failed from the Status drop-down list.

                                                                                                                            4. Select the check box and enter the required description.

                                                                                                                            5. Select test inner from the Next Step drop-down list.

                                                                                                                            6. Click Add.

                                                                                                                              The configured condition displays in the list.

                                                                                                                            7. Click Update.

                                                                                                                              The test inner step is updated with the latest settings.

                                                                                                                              Block Message Steps Using the Conditions Tab

                                                                                                                              The Conditions tab enables you to define conditions to block the messages in a step. The application checks for any blocking conditions, and if the conditions are met, then the messages in the step are not processed.

                                                                                                                              Assume a scenario where you want to block the messages that are sent to the customer if the customer cancels an activity. To handle the above scenario, define a condition to verify whether the value in the Activity Status field is Cancelled as follows:
                                                                                                                              1. Select the Start test message step from the Scenario steps section.

                                                                                                                              2. Select the Conditions tab.

                                                                                                                              3. Select Activity Status from the Field drop-down list.

                                                                                                                              4. Select In from the Condition drop-down list.

                                                                                                                              5. Enter Cancelled in the Value field.

                                                                                                                              6. Select Failed from the Result drop-down list.

                                                                                                                              7. Enter activity is cancelled in the Description field.

                                                                                                                              8. Select Check on message sending option.

                                                                                                                              9. Click Add.

                                                                                                                                The configured condition displays in the list. If an activity is cancelled, then the customer receives a notification that is configured in the Conditions tab, that is, “failed, activity is cancelled.”

                                                                                                                                Add Launch Conditions for Message Scenarios

                                                                                                                                Launch conditions are trigger events that invoke message scenarios and scenario steps to deliver configured messages to client systems.

                                                                                                                                Assume that you want to invoke the message scenario that you have created, that is, Route Not Activated when a resource’s route is not activated. Therefore, you need to add a launch condition to invoke the scenario as follows:
                                                                                                                                1. Click Configuration > Message Scenarios.

                                                                                                                                2. Click Add New in the Launch Conditions section.

                                                                                                                                3. Select Route is not Activated from the The scenario will be launched when drop-down list.

                                                                                                                                4. Enter the number of minutes in the minutes after shift starts according to calendar field.

                                                                                                                                5. Click OK.

                                                                                                                                  The launch condition displays in the Launch Conditions section of the Message Scenarios screen. For each launch condition of the scenario, the Launch Conditions section also displays the number of messages that are in the queue. If the number of messages is greater than 999, then the numbers are displayed as follows:
                                                                                                                                  • Range 1000-999999 - "k". For example, 1000 messages are displayed as "1k"; 10000 messages are displayed as "10k".

                                                                                                                                  • Range 1000000 and greater - "m". For example, 1000000 messages are displayed as "1m"; 123000000 messages are displayed as "123m"

                                                                                                                                  Note: When the user selects a message scenario in the routing plan as a Fallback option, a read-only launch condition, Routing fallback is automatically populated in the message scenario. When the user removes the message scenarios from all associated routing plans, the launch condition is removed from the message scenario. The launch condition has a count of routing plans to which it is associated. You can click the count of routing plans in the launch condition UI to view the routing plans.

                                                                                                                                  Send notification messages using channels

                                                                                                                                  Channels define a mechanism to communicate notification triggers to external systems. The Email agent is used for sending messages when the Email delivery channel is selected.

                                                                                                                                  However, if you want to send messages to an external system (for example, client system), then you must define the details of the client system (such as Host, Port number, URL, Connection method, and so on) using the Delivery Channels screen. For example, let us create a delivery channel, external sys 1 as follows:
                                                                                                                                  1. Click Channels.

                                                                                                                                    The Delivery Channels screen displays.

                                                                                                                                  2. Click the Plus icon on the left pane.

                                                                                                                                  3. Enter external sys 1 in the Name field.

                                                                                                                                  4. Select the required option from the Status drop-down list.

                                                                                                                                    Note: If notification scenarios contain at least one message step that uses an internal delivery channel (e-mail or voice) then that channel is accessible in the list of channels. A user with appropriate permissions can select Active or Inactive to resume or stop the message delivery for any external or internal channel. For example, you can block a channel using the Inactive option in Test instances to disallow test messages to reach real customers. Messages that are not delivered due to inactivated delivery channel get the status 'obsolete' with the description, EXTERNAL_NOTIFICATION_ARE_DISABLED. Note that the 'set property' messages do not have a delivery channel and cannot be handled this way.
                                                                                                                                  5. Enter agent.com in the Host field and 8080 in the Port number field.

                                                                                                                                    Note: Enter one of the following values (20, 21, 22, 25, 80, 290, 389, 443, 587, 873, 2401, 3668, 4011, 4142, 5308, 5666, 5900, 5901, 6666, 6460, 7800, 8080 8443, 14861 and 20106) in the Port field.
                                                                                                                                  6. Enter the URL Path of the server (optional).

                                                                                                                                  7. Enter the name and password of the user for authorization purpose.

                                                                                                                                  8. Select the Allow basic access authentication check box if you want to implement HTTP basic authentication while integrating with external systems.

                                                                                                                                    When you select the check box, the outbound methods (such as send_message, drop_message, get_message_status methods) send the standard HTTP header "Authorization" with base64-encoded user credentials (standard basic access authentication). Also, the <user> SOAP structure is sent in the body of the request. The client application can either use the standard HTTP header "Authorization" or the <user> SOAP structure to send user credentials in the request.
                                                                                                                                    Note: When the check box is not selected, the standard HTTP header is not used in the request and the client application can use the <user> SOAP structure for authentication. For more information, see the Integrating with Outbound API Guide.
                                                                                                                                  9. Select a connection from the Connection drop-down list to denote the encryption protocol type.

                                                                                                                                    Note: By default, Not Encrypted option is selected. If you select default encryption or any other encryption type, then complete the necessary fields in the Advanced Settings section.
                                                                                                                                  10. Click Add.

                                                                                                                                    The channel displays in the Delivery Channel drop-down list in the Add scenario step and Modify scenario step screens. The delivery channel, external sys 1 also displays on the left pane on the Delivery Channels screen. The channel details are displayed in:
                                                                                                                                    • Green if there are no warnings and the channel is active

                                                                                                                                    • Gray if there are no warnings and channel is inactive

                                                                                                                                    • Red if there are warnings, or count of message scenarios is greater than 0 and the channel is inactive

                                                                                                                                    Active and Inactive are also displayed on active and inactive channels respectively.

                                                                                                                                    Use Collaboration as a Delivery Channel

                                                                                                                                    You can use collaboration as a delivery channel to send alerts of different types of events or situations in Oracle Field Service Cloud to collaboration users (for example, technicians, help desk operators, and resources). Also, you can broadcast notifications or alerts to collaboration user groups or help desk groups on occurrence of an event or when a predefined condition is met in Oracle Field Service Cloud.

                                                                                                                                    • Subscribe to Collaboration to view the Collaboration option as a delivery channel in the message scenario. View the About screen in your instance to verify whether the service is enabled.

                                                                                                                                    • Create collaboration users, user groups, or help desk groups.
                                                                                                                                      Note: For more information on configuration settings, see the Configuring Collaboration section in the Oracle Field Service Collaboration Cloud Service Guide.

                                                                                                                                    For example, assume that you want to notify the resource using collaboration as a delivery channel when a activity is created in Oracle Field Service Cloud. Assume that the message scenario, new appt is associated with the Activity is Created launch condition and has a scenario step, Collab Alert.

                                                                                                                                    1. Log in to Oracle Field Service Cloud as a Administrator.

                                                                                                                                    2. Click Configuration, Message Scenarios.

                                                                                                                                    3. Select the Collab Alert scenario step.

                                                                                                                                    4. Select Collaboration from the Delivery Channel drop-down list in the Settings tab.

                                                                                                                                    5. Select one of the following options from the Recipient drop-down list:

                                                                                                                                      • Resource: Delivers message to the resource associated with the launch condition. By default, Oracle Field Service Cloud considers the language and time zone of the user associated with the resource.
                                                                                                                                        Note: If the collaboration permission is not configured for the resource, then the message scenario displays a False Method status in the Messages tab of the Activity Details screen for the scenario step.
                                                                                                                                      • use static address: Enables you to send the message to specific users, user groups, and helpdesks. Click Add New and search for the required users, user groups, and helpdesks. Select the required users, user groups, and helpdesks to add them to the Recipients section.
                                                                                                                                        Note: You must enter three letters in the Search field to search for the required users, user groups, and helpdesks.
                                                                                                                                    6. Enter the message content in the Subject and Body fields of the Patterns tab.

                                                                                                                                      Note: For example, if English is configured as the default language and if the Subject and Body fields in the Patterns tab is populated is English, then regardless of the user’s language, the message is sent to the recipient in English.However, you can use the Pattern tab to specify another language for the message content. You can specify any one of the languages selected from the My Display setting as the language for the message content. For example, if English is configured as the default language and the Subject and Body fields in the Patterns tab is populated is Spanish, then the message is sent to the recipient user in Spanish. If the default language is not configured then English is considered as the default language of the recipient and the message is sent to the recipient in English.
                                                                                                                                    7. Configure the required fields and click Save.

                                                                                                                                      The details such as sending time and the selected delivery channel are updated for the Scenario step.
                                                                                                                                    Assume that a new activity is assigned to the resource, Phillip. The message scenario is triggered and the Collab Alert scenario step is displayed with the New status in the Messages tab of the Activity Details screen.
                                                                                                                                    When the message alert is sent to the resource, the status in the Messages tab of the Activity Details screen changes to Sent.
                                                                                                                                    Note: If the scenario step is not configured properly or if the message alert is not sent to the resource, the status in the Messages tab of the Activity Details screen changes to Failed. However, if a message is invalidated because of an activity-related operation in Oracle Field Service Cloud (such as delete, move, suspend activity), the status in the Messages tab of the Activity Details screen changes to Obsolete.
                                                                                                                                    To view the message alert, log in to Oracle Field Service Cloud using resource’s login credentials.

                                                                                                                                    For more information, see the About Collaboration Window section in the Oracle Field Service Collaboration Cloud Service Guide.

                                                                                                                                      Add a Non-Working Reason

                                                                                                                                      If a resource is not available for work at some point during their regular work schedule/shift, then a non-working reason (illness, vacation, bereavement, etc.) must be applied to explain their absence. Once set, this reason appears on the calendar within the Daily view.

                                                                                                                                      The list of non-working reasons can be configured through the Configuration screen.
                                                                                                                                      1. To view the Non-Working Reasons screen:

                                                                                                                                        1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                                                                        2. In the General section, click Work Schedules.

                                                                                                                                          The Work Schedules screen appears.

                                                                                                                                        3. Click Non-Working Reasons.

                                                                                                                                      2. To add a new non-working reason, click Add non-working reason.

                                                                                                                                      3. To edit an existing non-working reason, click Modify on the far right of the grid.

                                                                                                                                        In either case, you will be prompted to enter a name and a label (unique identifier) for the non-working reason.

                                                                                                                                      Properties

                                                                                                                                      Properties

                                                                                                                                      Each entity (for example, activity, resource, inventory, and users) contains a set of associated attributes. For example, resource records may contain attributes such as name and contact information as well as physical attributes such as gender or a photograph. These attributes within Oracle Field Service Cloud are combinations of fields or custom properties.

                                                                                                                                      Properties with the Type “Field” are the native system properties that are available for the specified entities. For example, Name (property label, cname) is associated with an Activity, and Serial Number (property label, invsn) is associated with Inventory. Field type of properties can be mapped with similar client properties.
                                                                                                                                      Note: Multiple fields or properties with the same name can exist. For example, Name can refer to a customer’s name (property label, cname) or a resource’s name (property label, pname). In this example, each Name property is assigned to a different entity and has a different property label.
                                                                                                                                      Custom properties are attributes of entities that are unique to each client. You can create them through the user interface, import them, or create through an API. Once added, these properties are available for use in screen configurations, filters, and numerous configuration areas (for example, search fields, duration field, and so on). You can create the following types of properties:
                                                                                                                                      • String: These are custom properties that require alphanumeric entries. These can include free text boxes, URLs, phone numbers, or email addresses.

                                                                                                                                      • Integer: These are custom properties that require numeric entries. This option can also be used for check boxes.

                                                                                                                                      • Enumeration: These are custom properties that require selections from fixed lists. Option buttons and combo (drop-down lists) boxes are common examples of this property type.

                                                                                                                                      • File: These are custom properties that require some type of file upload. These could include MIME types such as .gif, .jpg, .pdf, .mpeg, .zip, html, .wav, or .doc. Examples of File properties could be customer signatures or even technician photos.

                                                                                                                                        Create a String Property

                                                                                                                                        The string property includes free text boxes, URLs, phone numbers or email addresses. Assume that resources can enter remarks for an activity after the activity is closed. The Activity Details form must contain a text box so the resource can enter remarks.

                                                                                                                                        1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                                                                        2. Click Properties in the Resources, Activities, Inventories section.

                                                                                                                                        3. Click Add New.

                                                                                                                                        4. Select String from theProperty Type drop-down list.

                                                                                                                                        5. Complete the following fields:

                                                                                                                                          • Property name(mandatory): Enter a name that you want to display to the end user in English and in all the languages that are active in the application.

                                                                                                                                          • Property label(mandatory): Enter a Unique database identifier for the Oracle Field Service Cloud API.

                                                                                                                                          • Property hint(optional): Enter a hint that you want to display when a user hovers over the field name. For example, Enter comments if any. Enter the text in English and in all the languages that are active in the application.

                                                                                                                                          • Regular expression: Enter an expression to validate the values or format the values in a certain way.

                                                                                                                                          • Entity(mandatory): Select Activity since the property is associated with the Activity Details form.

                                                                                                                                          • Lines Count(mandatory): Enter the number of lines that you want the property to display in the Activity Details form. For example, enter 3 to display a maximum of three lines.

                                                                                                                                          • GUI (optional): Select one of the following options to define how the property displays to users:

                                                                                                                                            • Text Element: Displays as a free text field. For our example, select this option.

                                                                                                                                            • URL: Displays as a clickable URL.

                                                                                                                                            • Phone: Displays as a clickable phone number.

                                                                                                                                            • Email: Displays as a clickable email address.

                                                                                                                                            • Geolocation Element: Displays a button to show the location on a map.

                                                                                                                                          • Regular expression (optional): Enter an expression to validate input or to force the data to display in a certain way.

                                                                                                                                            For example, if you want to display $23,540, then use the following regular expression: /^/$?([1-9]{1}[0-9]{0,2}(/,[0-9]{3})*(/.[0-9]{0,2})?|[1-9]{1}[0-9]{0,}(/.[0-9]{0,2})?|0(/.[0-9]{0,2})?|(/.[0-9]{1,2})?)$/

                                                                                                                                            Other examples:
                                                                                                                                            • Ethernet ARP address: /^([0-9a-fA-F]{2}:){5}[0-9a-fA-F]{2}$/

                                                                                                                                            • Phone number: (555)5555555: /[/(/)\d/-]{10}/

                                                                                                                                            • 16-bit integer: (0-65535): /(^\d{0,4}$)|(^6553[0-5]$)|(^655[0-2][0-9]$)|(^65[0-4]\d{2}$)|(^6[0-4]\d{3}$)|(^[0-5]\d{4}$)/

                                                                                                                                            • 1 digit: (0-9): /^\d{1}$/

                                                                                                                                            • 2 digits: (01-99): /^\d{2}$/

                                                                                                                                            • Integer: (0-99): /^\d{1,2}$/

                                                                                                                                            • Integer: (0-999): /^\d{1,3}$/

                                                                                                                                            • Any 6 symbols(you can change 6 to any number): /^.{6}$/u

                                                                                                                                            • Currency (USD with 2 decimal places): /^/$?([1-9]{1}[0-9]{0,2}(/,[0-9]{3})*(/.[0-9]{0,2})?|[1-9]{1}[0-9]{0,}(/.[0-9]{0,2})?|0(/.[0-9]{0,2})?|(/.[0-9]{1,2})?)$/

                                                                                                                                            • Date formatted as DD-MM-YYYY: /^((0[1-9])|([1-2][0-9])|30|31)-((0[1-9])|1[0-2])-2[0-9]{3}$/

                                                                                                                                          • Clone property on Reopen/Prework (optional): Enables you to duplicate the property while reopening the activity or applying prework for a new activity.

                                                                                                                                          • Formatting (optional): If selected, displays the following options:

                                                                                                                                            • Regular expression

                                                                                                                                            • XSL transformation (converts an XML file into a table format viewable in HTML that is read-only).

                                                                                                                                            Assume that you want to display the following data from a client system within Oracle Field Service Cloud:

                                                                                                                                            Group Price
                                                                                                                                            One Time Charges and Credits $ 100.00
                                                                                                                                            Programming Change $ 5.00
                                                                                                                                            Programming Change $ 5.00
                                                                                                                                            Programming Change $ 5.00
                                                                                                                                            Programming Change $ 5.00
                                                                                                                                            UNKNOWN $ 0.00
                                                                                                                                            Monthly Charges $ 129.98
                                                                                                                                            America’s Top 250 $ 69.99
                                                                                                                                            HD/SD (2TV) Receiver $ 14.00
                                                                                                                                            HD/SD (2TV) Receiver $ 14.00
                                                                                                                                            DVR Service $ 6.00
                                                                                                                                            Protection Plan $ 6.00
                                                                                                                                            Israeli: The Israeli Network $ 19.99
                                                                                                                                            Monthly Credits $ -10.00
                                                                                                                                            Cr: Agent $ 10x24 Mo $ -10.00
                                                                                                                                            Monthly Charges and Credits $ 119.98

                                                                                                                                          Use the following regular expression for the above data: /(/s+)?(.+/w)/s+(/$)/s+(.*)/n?/im = [item group="$1"] [name]$2[/name][price]$4[/price][currency]$3[/currency][/item]

                                                                                                                                          The following XML file converts the data given earlier into a table format:

                                                                                                                                          [xsl:stylesheet version="1.0" xmlns:xsl="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform"]
                                                                                                                                          [xsl:template match="/"]
                                                                                                                                          	
                                                                                                                                          	[style]
                                                                                                                                          		.property_table
                                                                                                                                          		{
                                                                                                                                          			font-size:12px;
                                                                                                                                          			font-family: Arial;
                                                                                                                                          			border-collapse: collapse;
                                                                                                                                          		}
                                                                                                                                          		.property_table .property_name
                                                                                                                                          		{
                                                                                                                                          			padding-left:15px;
                                                                                                                                          		}
                                                                                                                                          		.property_table td
                                                                                                                                          		{
                                                                                                                                          			border: 1px solid grey;
                                                                                                                                          			padding: 4px;
                                                                                                                                          		}
                                                                                                                                          		.property_table .property_price
                                                                                                                                          		{
                                                                                                                                          			text-aligh:right;
                                                                                                                                          		}
                                                                                                                                          		.property_group
                                                                                                                                          		{
                                                                                                                                          			background-color:#ccc;
                                                                                                                                          			font-weight: bold;
                                                                                                                                          		}
                                                                                                                                          		.property_group .property_name
                                                                                                                                          		{
                                                                                                                                          			padding-left:5px;
                                                                                                                                          			font-weight: bold;
                                                                                                                                          		}
                                                                                                                                          	[/style]
                                                                                                                                          	[table class="property_table"]
                                                                                                                                          		[xsl:for-each select="root/item"]
                                                                                                                                          			[xsl:choose]
                                                                                                                                          				[xsl:when test="@group=' '"]
                                                                                                                                          					[tr class="property_group"]
                                                                                                                                          						[td class="property_name"] [xsl:value-of select="name"/] [/td]
                                                                                                                                          						[td class="property_price"]
                                                                                                                                          							[span] [xsl:value-of select="currency"/] [/span]
                                                                                                                                          							[xsl:value-of select="price"/]
                                                                                                                                          						[/td]
                                                                                                                                          					[/tr]
                                                                                                                                          				[/xsl:when]
                                                                                                                                          				[xsl:otherwise]	
                                                                                                                                          					[tr] 
                                                                                                                                          						[td class="property_name"] [xsl:value-of select="name"/] [/td]
                                                                                                                                          						[td class="property_price"]
                                                                                                                                          							[span] [xsl:value-of select="currency"/] [/span]
                                                                                                                                          							[xsl:value-of select="price"/]
                                                                                                                                          						[/td]
                                                                                                                                          					[/tr]
                                                                                                                                          				[/xsl:otherwise]	
                                                                                                                                          			[/xsl:choose]
                                                                                                                                          		[/xsl:for-each]
                                                                                                                                          	[/table]
                                                                                                                                          [/xsl:template]
                                                                                                                                          [/xsl:stylesheet]

                                                                                                                                          Using XSL transformation, the above XML file is displayed in HTML as shown in the following figure:

                                                                                                                                          This figure shows the sample data displayed in HTML.
                                                                                                                                        6. Click Add.

                                                                                                                                          A system generated ID is assigned to the property. You can perform the following actions:
                                                                                                                                          • Click Export to export the properties to an XML file.

                                                                                                                                          • Click Import, Browse, and select the XML file that you want to import.

                                                                                                                                          Create an Enumeration Property

                                                                                                                                          Option buttons and drop-down lists are examples of the enumeration property. This means, you can have a set of valid values and you can select only one value from the enumeration set. For example, if you have four different types of customers, Standard, Gold, Silver, Bronze and you want to indicate the customer type on each activity record.

                                                                                                                                          This example creates an enumeration property, Customer level with four values, Standard, Gold, Silver, and Bronze, and displays the property as a drop-down list in the user interface.
                                                                                                                                          1. Click Properties in the Resources, Activities, Inventories section.

                                                                                                                                          2. Click Add New.

                                                                                                                                          3. Select Enumeration from the Property Type drop-down list.

                                                                                                                                          4. Enter Customer level in the Property Name field. Enter the name in English and in all the languages that are active in the application.

                                                                                                                                          5. Enter Cust_level in the Property label field.

                                                                                                                                          6. Select Activity from the Entity drop-down list.

                                                                                                                                          7. Select Combobox from the GUI drop-down list.

                                                                                                                                          8. Specify the value, Standard in the Enumeration Values field and click Add.

                                                                                                                                            Note: The values display in alpha-numeric order. The system automatically applies an index value to each specified value, and the index value is case sensitive. The APIs reference the index value. For example, if you want to use a readable value for the value, customer not home, you can use the code CNH instead of the default index value, 1 and map the code to the client system. You cannot edit the index value, after it is added.
                                                                                                                                          9. Repeat step 6 for each value, that is, Gold, Silver, and Bronze.

                                                                                                                                            The specified values display in the Values field.

                                                                                                                                          10. Select a value from the Values field.

                                                                                                                                          11. Clear the Active check box.

                                                                                                                                          12. Click Edit to make a value inactive and does not display in the user interface.

                                                                                                                                          13. Click Add.

                                                                                                                                            Create a File Property

                                                                                                                                            File property type supports file transfers such as documents, photos, or signatures. This means, you can upload MIME types such as .gif, .jpg, .pdf, .mpeg, .zip, html, .wav, or .doc files.

                                                                                                                                            1. Click Configuration > Properties.

                                                                                                                                            2. Click Add New.

                                                                                                                                            3. Select File from the Property Type drop-down list.

                                                                                                                                            4. Enter a name for the property in the Property Name field. Enter the name in English and in all the languages that are active in the application.

                                                                                                                                              This is the name that is displayed on the context layout screen and any screen to which the property is added.
                                                                                                                                            5. Enter a label for the property in the Property label field.

                                                                                                                                            6. Enter a hint that you want to display when a user hovers over the field name in the Property hint field. Enter the hint in English and in all the languages that are active in the application.

                                                                                                                                            7. Select the entity to which the property belongs, in the Entity field.

                                                                                                                                            8. Select one of the following options for the GUI field:

                                                                                                                                              Option Description
                                                                                                                                              File element Select this option to upload a photo. When uploaded, the photo displays as a text link in the user interface. The following fields are displayed for this option:
                                                                                                                                              • File size limit: Select the maximum file size you want to allow for File elements in Oracle Field Service Mobility Cloud Service. This field is displayed only for the File element option. The default and the maximum size allowed is 5 MB.

                                                                                                                                              • Allowed MIME types delimiter: Select whether you want to display commas between multiple uploaded files or you want to display each file on a new line.

                                                                                                                                              • Allowed MIME Types: Click the required types of files you want to allow for upload.

                                                                                                                                              Signature element Select this option to capture the resource’s signature.
                                                                                                                                              Image element Select this option to enable the user’s device to capture and upload the user’s photo, and to display the image as a thumbnail. The following fields are displayed for this option:
                                                                                                                                              • Allow draw on image: Select this check box to let the user draw on the captured image using a stylus.

                                                                                                                                              • Get geolocation: Select this option to save the location information on a map with the captured image.

                                                                                                                                              • Maximum picture width (in pixels): Enter the maximum width the captured image can have. The recommended width is 1000 pixels.

                                                                                                                                              • Maximum picture height (in pixels): Enter the maximum height the captured image can have. The recommended height is 1000 pixels. Maximum resolution limits should be exceed 5000x5000 pixels. The Minimal value is 10 pixels.

                                                                                                                                            9. Select whether you want to copy the property data when an activity is reopened or has a pre-work activity in the Clone property data on Reopen or Prework field.

                                                                                                                                            10. Click Add.

                                                                                                                                              The new property type is added. Add this property to the context layout of the screen for the user profile for which you want to display.

                                                                                                                                              Create an Integer Property

                                                                                                                                              Check boxes and text fields are examples of the integer property. Use the integer property to enter numerical values such as port number, or to select your decision such as whether an additional inventory has been approved by the dispatcher [Yes/No].

                                                                                                                                              This example creates an integer property, Customer confirmed, and displays the property as a check box in the user interface.
                                                                                                                                              1. Navigate to the Configuration screen.

                                                                                                                                              2. Click Properties in the Resources, Activities, Inventories section.

                                                                                                                                              3. Click Add New.

                                                                                                                                              4. Select Integer from the Property Type drop-down list.

                                                                                                                                              5. Enter Customer confirmed in the Property Name field. Enter the name in English and in all the languages that are active in the application.

                                                                                                                                              6. Enter Cust_decision in the Property label field.

                                                                                                                                              7. Select Activity from the Entity drop-down list.

                                                                                                                                              8. Select Checkbox element for GUI.

                                                                                                                                              9. Enter an expression in the Regular expression field to validate input or to force the data to display in a certain way.

                                                                                                                                              10. Select whether you want to duplicate the property while reopening the activity or applying pre-work for a new activity.

                                                                                                                                              11. Click Add.

                                                                                                                                                The newly added property appears on the Properties screen.

                                                                                                                                                Add a String Property to the Screen Configuration

                                                                                                                                                After you create a property, you can assign it to a specific user type and determine where the property type displays on the screen.

                                                                                                                                                Also, you can define the following visibility settings for the property type:
                                                                                                                                                • Read only, read/write, or mandatory options.

                                                                                                                                                • Conditions under which the property type displays.

                                                                                                                                                  Note: Not all conditions are available for every screen context.

                                                                                                                                                Let’s assign the string property, CSR Notes property to a User Type, Administrator, and add it to the Activity Details form. Also, let us set the property type to Read-Only when the activity status is Completed and change the property type to Read Write when the activity status is Pending. To add a string property:

                                                                                                                                                1. Click Configuration, User Types in the Users and Security section.

                                                                                                                                                  The existing users display in the left pane.

                                                                                                                                                2. Select Administrator from the left pane.

                                                                                                                                                3. Select the Screen Configuration tab.

                                                                                                                                                4. Expand Manage and click Add activity/Activity details.

                                                                                                                                                5. Select a property from the Layout Structure pane and click Add property.

                                                                                                                                                6. Select the property, CSR Notes and click OK.

                                                                                                                                                  The property, CSR Notes displays in the Layout Structure pane.

                                                                                                                                                7. Click Add New Visibility and select Read-Only.

                                                                                                                                                8. Click Add New Condition.

                                                                                                                                                9. Select Activity Status and in (equal) from the drop-down lists.

                                                                                                                                                10. Click the Plus icon, select Completed, and clickSave.

                                                                                                                                                11. Click Add New Visibility and selectRead-Write.

                                                                                                                                                12. Click Add New Condition.

                                                                                                                                                13. Select Activity Status and in (equal) from the drop-down lists.

                                                                                                                                                14. Click the Plus icon, select Pending, and click Save.

                                                                                                                                                You can view both the conditions in the Conditions column.

                                                                                                                                                  Resource Types

                                                                                                                                                  A resource type helps you identify the following differences:

                                                                                                                                                  • Account for cost differences between full time employees and contractors.

                                                                                                                                                  • Identify the resources that you want to track using geolocation.

                                                                                                                                                  • Manage quota and capacity for resources.

                                                                                                                                                  • Distinguish between team holder and team member.

                                                                                                                                                  • Share a resource’s inventory and work skills in a team.

                                                                                                                                                  You can create different resource types to differentiate the hierarchy of the Resource Tree. While creating a resource type, each resource type is assigned to a role. The roles (Field Resource, Vehicle, Tool, Bucket, and Organization Unit) enable you to differentiate the hierarchy of the Resource Tree. Each role is represented with the icons, Blue, Yellow, or Grey.

                                                                                                                                                  By default, the Load Threshold section displays (unless the Organization Unit role is selected) on the Add Resource Type screen and has the following options to determine how the icons display on the resource tree based on the resource’s load (full, normal, or empty load):
                                                                                                                                                  • Number of Activities: Defined amount of activities, over which a resource is considered to have full load and below which is considered an empty load.

                                                                                                                                                  • Hours: Defined amount of hours including travel, over which a resource is considered to have full load and below which is considered an empty load.

                                                                                                                                                  • Time Percent: Defined % of a resource’s work schedule for the day that includes activities and travels among them that is considered to be full, normal or empty. Travel time to and from work for the day is not included in these calculations.

                                                                                                                                                  Note: Specify the number of activities, hours, percentages in the Full Load or Empty fields. The display of icons on the resource tree depends on the specified values. For example, if 10 activities represent Full load, then the Blue icon displays.

                                                                                                                                                    Add a Resource Type for the Field Resource Role

                                                                                                                                                    A Field Resource is a resource that performs work, has work skills and work zones associated, and has a related user (actual person performing work or group of people). A Field Resource requires a user, can execute work, is shown with a Tech icon and does not include the Organization unit option.

                                                                                                                                                    Assume that you want to assign activities to a technician. Therefore, you have to create a resource type, technician and select Field Resource from the Role drop-down list.
                                                                                                                                                    Note: Some features are available only during the initial configuration. This will vary based on the options selected during the configuration. Features that are not available for editing after the initial configuration will be greyed out.
                                                                                                                                                    To add a resource type for the Field Resource role:
                                                                                                                                                    1. Click Company Name > Configuration.

                                                                                                                                                    2. Click Resource Types in the Resources, Activities, Inventories section.

                                                                                                                                                    3. Click Add resource type.

                                                                                                                                                    4. Enter the following information:

                                                                                                                                                      Field Description
                                                                                                                                                      Name (mandatory) Enter a name for the resource type. All supported languages are listed.
                                                                                                                                                      Label (mandatory) A unique identifier for the resource type that is mapped to the Resource Management API.
                                                                                                                                                      Active By default, the Active check box is selected and the resource type is activated.
                                                                                                                                                      Statistic Parameters section
                                                                                                                                                      Personalize the estimation of activity duration check box When selected, the resource’s personal profile is used for duration calculations. Else, uses only company estimates. For more information, see How Activity Duration Is Calculated
                                                                                                                                                      Use durations reported to enhance company-wide estimations check box When selected, company-wide estimations are modified based on the data reported by the resource. If not selected, the company-wide estimations are not changed. This applies to both activity durations and travel estimations. Do not select this check box, if you do not want the durations reported by the resource to affect company level estimations.
                                                                                                                                                      Do not consider reported data for the first ____ working days, for statistic estimations Data reported by the resource does not affect the company-wide estimations for the initial number of days specified in this field. The date is considered from the time the user accesses the system. Default value is 5 days. For example, if you enter 15 days, then the data reported by the resource for activity and travel durations are ignored for the first 15 days and will not be considered while calculating the company-wide estimates. This field is enabled only if the Use data reported to enhance company-wide estimations field is selected.
                                                                                                                                                    5. Select Field Resource from the Role drop-down list.

                                                                                                                                                    6. Select the required features from the following list:

                                                                                                                                                      • Resource can participate in a team: Select the Resource can participate in a team check box to determine whether the resource type is an assistant for teamwork activities. If deselected, then you cannot add the resource type, technician as an assistant to a team.

                                                                                                                                                      • Resource can be a teamholder: Select the Resource can be a teamholder check box to determine whether the resource type is a primary team holder of an activity.
                                                                                                                                                        Note: An activity that requires a team is always assigned to the team holder whereas the assisting teamwork activities are assigned to the assistants for the duration of the teamwork.
                                                                                                                                                      • Share inventory in teamwork: Determines whether the resource type shares inventory with other team members after an activity is started. For example, if the team holder’s inventory has 5 items and the assistant’s inventory has 3 items, then when the activity is started, there are 8 items available for use at the job site.

                                                                                                                                                      • Share geolocation in teamwork: Select the check box to define whether a resource (team holder or assistant) shares the geolocation in a teamwork assignment. Although, the application uses the GPS device of each resource to predict the location of the resource, the following situations can occur:
                                                                                                                                                        • Application is unable to obtain coordinates since the device of a resource has stopped to work.

                                                                                                                                                        • Application is unable to find the location of the resource due to some reasons.

                                                                                                                                                        In the above situations, the application uses an algorithm to predict the location of the resource using the coordinates of other resources in the team. Therefore, you can view the location of each team resource in the map view.

                                                                                                                                                      • Share work skills in teamwork (team-member only): Enables the resource to share work skills with the team holder. Sharing is defined on the work skill level according to the "Sharing of the skill in the team" parameter configured in the Add work skill screen.

                                                                                                                                                      • Used for Quota management: Enables you to consider the working time of each resource into the overall workflow capacity calculation of the bucket.

                                                                                                                                                        For example, assume that each resource (Technician 1, Technician 2, and Technician 3 configured as a Field Resource) has a capacity of 480 minutes per day and the Use as Capacity Area check box is selected for each resource. Therefore, the Max Available field in the bucket has the overall workflow capacity of 1440 minutes. Now, if a new resource type, Technician 4 is added and if the Use as Capacity Area check box is selected, then the overall workflow capacity of the bucket changes to 1920 minutes.

                                                                                                                                                      • Routing can assign activities: Select the check box if you want routing to assign activities to a resource.

                                                                                                                                                        If selected, the following options enable you to specify the cost of the resource’s time that helps you to differentiate between resources (for example, Full time resources versus Contractors):

                                                                                                                                                        • Working hours cost: Actual working hours of the resource during the day based on activity durations. Select an option (Low, Normal, High, Highest). The routing algorithm factors working time cost differences between resource types for assignments.

                                                                                                                                                        • Overtime cost: Overtime refers to the minutes worked beyond the end of the resource’s working hours for the day. Specify cost increases either as X minutes after the end of the shift or the time beyond the X minutes threshold.

                                                                                                                                                        • Travel Time cost: Refers to the estimated time and the cost required for travelling between activities.

                                                                                                                                                      • Working time : Define the travel allowance for resources using the following options:
                                                                                                                                                        • Start travel: Enables routing to consider travel time from the beginning of the resource’s working time for the day and to the resource’s first activity. The application estimates the actual travel time to the location of the first activity, when a resource’s Start location is defined. Note that when a route includes activities that require travel and activities that do not need travel, the travel between activities is split into two (or more) pieces by inserting non-travel activities in between. If there is any idle time before an activity, it is considered as travel time for the next activity. Select one of the following options:
                                                                                                                                                          • Travel time to the first activity is not included from the Working Time Start – when selected, travel time to the first activity will not be calculated. If an activity has a Service Window of 8:00 am-10:00 am, the activity will have an ETA of 8:00 am and the resource will have to leave their start location to arrive by 8:00 am.

                                                                                                                                                          • Travel time to the first activity is included from the Working Time Start – when selected, travel time will be calculated to the first activity. If a resource has 30 minutes of travel and the activity has a service window of 8:00 am-10:00 am the activity’s ETA will be 08:30 am.

                                                                                                                                                          • Resource is allotted up to <number> minutes of travel time prior to the Working Time Start – when selected, a portion of the travel time can occur prior to the start of the shift. If the value is set to 30 minutes and the resource need 45 minutes of travel the first 30 minutes will occur prior to the start of the shift and the ETA activity’s ETA will be 08:15 am.

                                                                                                                                                        • Final travel: Enables routing to consider travel time to a known end location. Select one of the following options:
                                                                                                                                                          • Travel time from the last activity to the Resources End Location is not included from the Working Time End – when selected, travel time to the final location will not be calculated. If a resource’s shift ends at 6:00 pm with no overtime allowed, routing can assign activities that can end at 6:00 pm.

                                                                                                                                                          • Travel time from the last activity to the Resources End Location is included from the Working Time End – when selected, travel time to the final location will be calculated. If a resource’s shift ends at 6:00 pm with no overtime allowed, routing cannot assign activities that can end at 6:00 pm.

                                                                                                                                                          • Resource is allotted up to <number> minutes of travel time after the Working Time End – when selected, a portion of the travel time will occur after the shift ends. Suppose that the resource’s shift ends at 6:00 pm with no overtime allowed. When the value is set to 30 minutes and the resource needs 45 minutes of travel to the end location, the latest an activity can end would be 5:45pm.

                                                                                                                                                      • Enable 'Not activated in time' alert and trigger: Represents an alert that the resource’s route is not activated. For example, consider the resources, Technician 1 and Technician 2 configured as field resources. If the Enable 'Not activated in time' alert and trigger check box is selected for the resource, Technician 1 and not selected for Technician 2, then the notification messages are created only for Technician 1.

                                                                                                                                                    7. Click Add.

                                                                                                                                                      Note: The following features are available when a role, Vehicle or Tool is assigned to a resource type:
                                                                                                                                                      • Share inventory in teamwork

                                                                                                                                                      • Share geolocation in teamwork

                                                                                                                                                      • Share work skills in teamwork (team-member only)

                                                                                                                                                      • Working time includes travel to first activity

                                                                                                                                                      • Working time includes travel from last activity

                                                                                                                                                      • Enable 'Not activated in time' alert and trigger

                                                                                                                                                    The resource type, technician displays on the Resource Types screen. If you click Modify and change a feature setting of a resource type, the application automatically applies the changes to the resource type.

                                                                                                                                                      Example: Travel Allowance Calculation

                                                                                                                                                      Roger’s assigned Resource Type has the following Work Time configurations:
                                                                                                                                                      • Travel time to the first activity is included from the Working Time Start

                                                                                                                                                      • Travel time from the last activity to the Resources End Location is included from the Working Time End

                                                                                                                                                      Jane and John’s assigned Resource Type has the following Working Time configurations:
                                                                                                                                                      • Resource is allotted up to 30 minutes of travel time prior to the Working Time Start

                                                                                                                                                      • Resource is allotted up to 30 minutes of travel time after the Working Time End

                                                                                                                                                      Consider Roger, Jane, and John, who have their work shift from 9:00 am to 6:00 pm and the following distances from work place:
                                                                                                                                                      • Roger lives 30 minutes from his first and last job. So, for both jobs, 30 minutes of travel is included part of his workday.

                                                                                                                                                      • Jane lives 45 minutes away from the first and last job. So, for both of her jobs only 15 minutes of the travel should be counted as part of her workday and the additional 30 minutes is beyond her workday.

                                                                                                                                                      • John lives 20 minutes away from his first and last job. So, no travel is part of his workday and the 20 minutes travel for the last job is done beyond his workday.

                                                                                                                                                      Using this example, if a new activity is created that is estimated to finish by 5:45 pm and overtime is no allowed, routing will not assign this activity to Roger. If it was assigned, Roger would incur overtime, because his shift ends at 6:00 pm. The routing engine would look for a more suitable resource.

                                                                                                                                                        Add a Resource Type for the Bucket Role

                                                                                                                                                        A bucket accumulates work that has not yet been distributed to field resources. A bucket does not require a user, cannot execute work or activities, is shown with a Double Tech icon, includes group option, and can have activities assigned.

                                                                                                                                                        Note: Some features are available only during the initial configuration. This will vary based on the options selected during the configuration. Features that are not available for editing after the initial configuration will be greyed out.
                                                                                                                                                        1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                                                                                        2. Click Resource Types in the Resources, Activities, Inventories section.

                                                                                                                                                        3. Click Add resource type.

                                                                                                                                                        4. Select Bucket from the Role drop-down list.

                                                                                                                                                        5. Enter the following information:

                                                                                                                                                          • Name (Mandatory): Enter a name for the resource type. All supported languages are listed.

                                                                                                                                                          • Label (Mandatory): A unique identifier for the resource type that is mapped to the Resource Management API.

                                                                                                                                                          • Active: Select the Active check box to activate the resource type.

                                                                                                                                                        6. Select the Use as Capacity Area check box.

                                                                                                                                                          This option is available only if you have purchased Capacity Cloud Service. For more details about Quota Management in Bucket, see the Oracle Field Service Cloud Using Capacity Cloud Service Guide guide.
                                                                                                                                                        7. Select the Routing can assign activities check box if you want routing to assign activities to the bucket.

                                                                                                                                                        8. Click Add.

                                                                                                                                                          The resource type, Bucket displays on the Resource Types screen.

                                                                                                                                                          Add a Resource Type for the Organization Unit Role

                                                                                                                                                          An organization unit aggregates field resources, vehicles, and tools in a hierarchical structure to simplify management and reporting. An organization unit does not require a user, cannot execute work or activities, is shown with a Double Tech icon, includes group option and can have activities assigned.

                                                                                                                                                          Note: Some features are available only during the initial configuration. This will vary based on the options selected during the configuration. Features that are not available for editing after the initial configuration will be greyed out.
                                                                                                                                                          1. Click Company Name > Configuration.

                                                                                                                                                          2. Click Resource Types in the Resources, Activities, Inventories section.

                                                                                                                                                          3. Click Add resource type.

                                                                                                                                                          4. Select Organization unit from the Role drop-down list.

                                                                                                                                                          5. Enter the following information:

                                                                                                                                                            • Name (Mandatory): Enter a name for the resource type. All supported languages are listed.

                                                                                                                                                            • Label (Mandatory): A unique identifier for the resource type that is mapped to the Resource Management API.

                                                                                                                                                            • Active: Select the Active check box to activate the resource type.

                                                                                                                                                          6. Select the Use as Capacity Area check box to aggregate the capacity across buckets.

                                                                                                                                                            For example, assume that the maximum available capacity for Bucket 1 is 1920 minutes and the Use as Capacity Area check box is selected. Bucket 2 has a maximum available capacity of 2400 minutes and the Use as Capacity Area check box is not selected. Now, if you select Use as Capacity Area check box check box for Bucket 2, then the resource type, Group aggregates the capacity across Bucket 1 and Bucket 2 and changes the maximum available capacity of the Group to 4320 minutes.
                                                                                                                                                          7. Click Add.

                                                                                                                                                          The resource type, Organization Unit displays on the Resource Types screen.

                                                                                                                                                            Add a Resource Type for Contingent Worker

                                                                                                                                                            Contingent (or Infrequent) Workforce is one where the workers do not work directly for the company. They are contractors that may not have dedicated or assigned routes everyday. They will be assigned work infrequently on an ad-hoc basis.

                                                                                                                                                            Note: The Contingent Worker service must be enabled and available as part of your Oracle Field Service Cloud subscription.
                                                                                                                                                            1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                                                                                            2. Click Resource Types in the Resources, Activities, Inventories section.

                                                                                                                                                            3. Click Add resource type.

                                                                                                                                                            4. Enter the following information:

                                                                                                                                                              Field Description
                                                                                                                                                              Name (mandatory) Enter a name for the resource type. All supported languages are listed.
                                                                                                                                                              Label (mandatory) A unique identifier for the resource type that is mapped to the Resource Management API.
                                                                                                                                                              Active By default, the Active check box is selected and the resource type is activated.
                                                                                                                                                            5. Select Field Resource from the Role drop-down list.

                                                                                                                                                            6. Select the Resource is a contingent worker check box.

                                                                                                                                                              The remaining check boxes are grayed out. The following rules apply to contingent worker resources:
                                                                                                                                                              • When the Resource is a contingent worker check box is selected, the Role cannot be anything other than "Field Resource".

                                                                                                                                                              • This resource cannot participate in teamwork.

                                                                                                                                                              • This resource cannot access resources other than themselves.

                                                                                                                                                              • This resource cannot access the video chat service if provisioned.

                                                                                                                                                              • Quota does not consider contingent workers while calculating the available capacity.

                                                                                                                                                              • Bulk, urgent, and immediate routing do not assign activities to this resource.

                                                                                                                                                              • The alert regarding route activation does not display for this resource.

                                                                                                                                                              • Travel and activity duration from these resources are not included in the company-wide statistics.

                                                                                                                                                              Note: The Resource is a contingent worker check box is grayed out on the Edit resource type screen. This means, after you create a contingent worker resource type, you cannot change it back to a normal resource. Further, a contingent worker resource can only be a field resource and this resource must have only one corresponding contingent worker user. Contingent workers are automatically removed from the application, if they have not activated a route in 12 continuous months.

                                                                                                                                                              Routing Profiles

                                                                                                                                                              Routing Profiles are used in Oracle Field Service Cloud Routing Cloud Service. Routing profiles contain the routing plan or plans that run against a bucket. Routing profiles can group more than one routing plan together so they can all run against one bucket. For more information about Routing Profiles and Routing Plans, see the Oracle Field Service Cloud Routing Cloud Service User Guide.

                                                                                                                                                              Shifts

                                                                                                                                                              Add a Shift

                                                                                                                                                              Shifts are defined as patterns of working time. This feature is designed to help with the non-standard types of shift that do not fall within the traditional 24-hour clock. You can create separate shifts for each of the different working time patterns within your organization.

                                                                                                                                                              1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                                                                                              2. In the General section, click Work Schedules.

                                                                                                                                                                The Work Schedules screen appears.

                                                                                                                                                              3. Click Shifts.

                                                                                                                                                                The Shifts screen appears.

                                                                                                                                                              4. Click Add Shift.

                                                                                                                                                                The Add Shift window appears.

                                                                                                                                                              5. Fill up the following fields:

                                                                                                                                                                Field Description
                                                                                                                                                                Name Enter a name for the shift, as it appears in the application.
                                                                                                                                                                Label A unique identifier for this shift.
                                                                                                                                                                Type Select an option from the drop-down menu. Common shift types include Regular for standard periods of time, or On-call for longer time frames that a resource might be available, after the regular shift ends.
                                                                                                                                                                Note: You can create only one on-call shift per day. If you create a second on-call shift, the first one is deleted.
                                                                                                                                                                Active Click the check box to activate (make available for use) this shift.
                                                                                                                                                                Time From Enter the start time for this shift.
                                                                                                                                                                Time To Enter the end time for this shift.
                                                                                                                                                                Points Within the application, points are used as limiters. If activities are assigned point values (based on different completion durations, complexity, value, etc.), then assignment caps can be determined on a shift-by-shift basis. Once point thresholds are reached for a resource to which that shift is assigned, then routing will allocate no more activities to that resource.

                                                                                                                                                              Add an Activity to a Shift

                                                                                                                                                              When you add an activity to a shift, the activity is added to the calendars of all of the resources that have that shift assigned to them.

                                                                                                                                                              1. Click Configuration, Work Schedules, Shifts.

                                                                                                                                                                The Shifts list displays.

                                                                                                                                                              2. Click the Activities link in the row of the shift that you want to add the activity to.

                                                                                                                                                              3. Click Add Activity.

                                                                                                                                                                The Add Activity screen displays. If this activity is an internal activity, the layout of the screen changes. If it is a customer-facing activity, the layout stays the same.

                                                                                                                                                              4. Complete the applicable fields.

                                                                                                                                                                Field name Action
                                                                                                                                                                Activity Type Select the activity type from the Activity Type drop-down list.
                                                                                                                                                                Name Enter the customer’s name. Used for customer-facing activities only.
                                                                                                                                                                Work Order Enter the work order number associated with this activity.
                                                                                                                                                                Duration Enter the amount of time that the activity lasts.
                                                                                                                                                                Position in Route-Not Ordered The activity is not ordered, and appears as scheduled/not ordered in the lower portion of the time view interface.
                                                                                                                                                                Position in Route-Ordered The activity is displayed on the resource's route. If you specify a time slot, the activity displays in that time slot. Otherwise, it displays aspending at the beginning of the route.
                                                                                                                                                                Time Slot Select the period of time within which this activity can be started.
                                                                                                                                                                Activity Notes Enter any notes associated with this activity.
                                                                                                                                                                Recurrence-Repeats-Daily Apply to schedules such as every other day or every 3rd day. If you select this option, add the frequency of occurrence in the field Days between occurrences.
                                                                                                                                                                Recurrence-Repeats-Everyday Applies to every day schedules that repeat without exception and without any modification options.
                                                                                                                                                                Recurrence-Repeats-Weekly Apply calendars that have a regular weekly pattern. Select the days that apply to this shift using the check boxes for the individual days. Indicate the frequency of this pattern weekly by adding a value to the Weeks between occurrences field.
                                                                                                                                                                Recurrence-Repeats-Yearly Occurs every year from the selected date entered in the From day until the date entered in the To day field.
                                                                                                                                                              5. Click OK.

                                                                                                                                                              View Statistics Parameters

                                                                                                                                                              Oracle Field Service Cloud uses collected statistical data on actual activity and travel duration for calculating a resource’s estimated time arrival for the pending activities and the delivery window. In addition, the Routing module uses the collected statistics to assign activities to resource in the most effective manner according to specified routing parameters. Statistical parameters are calculated separately for each resource, group/bucket and whole company. If the data is not enough to predict duration or travel for a resource, then group/bucket or company values are used. Finally, if the data is not enough at the company level, then default values are used.

                                                                                                                                                              1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                                                                                              2. In the Subsystems and Integrations section, click Statistics.

                                                                                                                                                                The Statistics screen appears.

                                                                                                                                                                Field Description
                                                                                                                                                                Duration parameters
                                                                                                                                                                Minimum relevant duration time in minutes

                                                                                                                                                                Maximum relevant duration time in minutes

                                                                                                                                                                To ensure that outlier activity durations (sometimes due to non-compliance) do not adversely affect statistical calculations, durations with values less than or more than the minutes entered in these fields will be ignored by the statistics engine.

                                                                                                                                                                Lower limit for personal ratio to calculate duration (%)

                                                                                                                                                                Upper limit for personal ratio to calculate duration (%)

                                                                                                                                                                The lower and upper limit percentages are with respect to the company level duration for an activity. If the duration estimated for a resource’s assigned activity is beyond the lower or upper limit, the estimate is corrected so that it lies within the set limits. The Lower limit default value is 50 with an available range from 0-100. The Upper limit default value is 200 with an available range from 100-999. If the preference is always to use the personal learned duration without any lower or upper limits applied, the ranges must be set for the outer extremes with the lower limit set to 0 and the upper limit set to 999.

                                                                                                                                                                Example: Suppose the company-level estimation for an activity is 50 minutes and the lower limit percentage is set to 80%. If the estimation for a resource is 30 minutes, the final estimation for the activity will be calculated as the maximum of 30 minutes and 80% of 50 minutes, which will be 40 minutes. The lower limit would be in effect and 40 minutes would be assigned to the activity.

                                                                                                                                                                Travel time parameters
                                                                                                                                                                Default travel average time The average value and standard deviation (in minutes) used for travel time prediction when there isn't statistical data for travel between two specific travel statistics keys.
                                                                                                                                                                Minimum relevant travel time in minutes

                                                                                                                                                                Maximum relevant travel time in minutes

                                                                                                                                                                In an effort to ensure that outlier travel durations (sometimes due to non-compliance) will not adversely affect statistical calculations, durations with values less than or more than the minutes entered in these fields will be ignored by the statistics engine.
                                                                                                                                                                Coordinate calculation weight This parameter defines the weighting proportion between the statistic (average travel time) and coordinate methods (straight line/airline) of calculating/predicting travel time between two locations. The options are as follows:
                                                                                                                                                                • 0 = Use only travel key based estimation

                                                                                                                                                                • 0.001 = Prefer travel key based estimation

                                                                                                                                                                • 0.5 = Use both estimations evenly

                                                                                                                                                                • 0.999 = Prefer coordinate method based estimation

                                                                                                                                                                • 1 = Use only coordinate method based estimation

                                                                                                                                                                Airline distance speed The speed used to determine airline (straight line) distance time.
                                                                                                                                                                Departure/parking time The amount of time that is allowed for parking and departure from one activity to another.
                                                                                                                                                                Delivery Window Parameters
                                                                                                                                                                Delivery window factor Determines how much deviation should affect the calculation of future delivery windows based on their ETAs.
                                                                                                                                                                Delivery window granularity This defines the number of minutes to which delivery window values will be rounded.
                                                                                                                                                                Delivery window minimal size When delivery window is calculated, this is the smallest value (in minutes) that will be provided.
                                                                                                                                                                Delivery window maximal size When delivery window is calculated, this is the largest value (in minutes) that will be provided.
                                                                                                                                                                Delivery window should not start earlier than [ ] minutes prior to start of service or SLA window Prevents the delivery window from starting outside the previously agreed service window. When the option is enabled, the statistically calculated delivery window cannot start earlier than the specified number of minutes before the service window or SLA window start.
                                                                                                                                                                Stats Fields
                                                                                                                                                                Activity duration stats fields

                                                                                                                                                                Activity travel stats fields

                                                                                                                                                                Resource duration stats fields

                                                                                                                                                                Resource travel stats fields

                                                                                                                                                                This group represents the formation of the keys (made up of fields) used for the grouping of work duration and travel duration values to find the averages.

                                                                                                                                                                The user-defined activity keys make it possible to sort the collected statistical data according to various activity characteristics, such as work order type, activity properties, activity postcode, etc.

                                                                                                                                                                Note: You can specify durations for specific activities and technicians through APIs. For more information, see the REST API for Oracle Field Service Cloud guide.

                                                                                                                                                              Update Travel Statistics

                                                                                                                                                              Travel statistics can be updated when the not assigned activities with default travel time are assigned to a resource. The travel time is received from Oracle Spatial and Graph Route Server which updates the travel statistics in real-time.

                                                                                                                                                              1. Open Configuration > Statistics.

                                                                                                                                                                The Statistics page appears.

                                                                                                                                                              2. Set up the Default Travel Time and Minimal Statistical Travel Time to ensure there is no statistical information for the travel time between these activities.

                                                                                                                                                                The setup time is applied to the activities of the bucket.

                                                                                                                                                              3. To assign the activities in the bucket to a resource, select the appropriate activities and click Move.

                                                                                                                                                                The travel time value is received from street level route service and set up as per this value.

                                                                                                                                                              Themes

                                                                                                                                                              View Themes

                                                                                                                                                              You can implement custom Themes that allow customers to use their own logos as headers in the user interface or on the login page. In addition, it allows customers the ability to define a custom theme color, which appears as the header. Access to the Themes is controlled by the Themes visibility. For each user type that you want to manage Themes, set the Read/Write permissions. When the visibility is set to ReadOnly, Themes is disabled, and when no visibility has been granted, the Themes screen is not visible at all.

                                                                                                                                                              1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                                                                                              2. In the Displays section, click Themes.

                                                                                                                                                                The Themes screen appears and displays the following fields:

                                                                                                                                                                Field Description
                                                                                                                                                                Name The name of the theme.
                                                                                                                                                                Default Displays whether the theme is selected as the default theme. The default theme has a check mark next to it. When you click Select default, you can set whether all users or only new users will have this theme set as the default.
                                                                                                                                                                Active Displays whether the theme is active. An active theme has a check mark next to it. The Set enable or Set disable actions determine whether the theme is active or not.
                                                                                                                                                                Actions Displays the actions available for the Theme. The following actions are available:
                                                                                                                                                                • Edit – Allows editing the options for the selected theme. See the Add a Theme section for an explanation of the options.

                                                                                                                                                                • Set default - Sets this theme as the default theme. You can set whether all users or only new users will have this theme set as the default.

                                                                                                                                                                • Set enable - Enables a currently disabled theme.

                                                                                                                                                                • Set disable - Disables a currently enabled theme.

                                                                                                                                                                • Export – Exports the details of the theme to a zip file. The zip file can be used to import the theme into another Oracle Field Service Cloud instance.

                                                                                                                                                                • Delete – Deletes the theme.

                                                                                                                                                              Add a Theme

                                                                                                                                                              You can implement custom Themes that allow customers to use their own logos as headers in the user interface or on the login page. In addition, it allows customers the ability to define a custom theme color, which appears as the header. Access to the Themes is controlled by the Themes visibility. For each user type that you want to manage Themes, set the Read/Write permissions. When the visibility is set to ReadOnly, Themes is disabled, and when no visibility has been granted, the Themes screen is not visible at all.

                                                                                                                                                              1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                                                                                              2. In the Displays section, click Themes.

                                                                                                                                                                The Themes screen appears.

                                                                                                                                                              3. Click Add new.

                                                                                                                                                                The Add theme window appears.

                                                                                                                                                              4. Complete the following fields:

                                                                                                                                                                Field Description
                                                                                                                                                                Name The name of the theme.
                                                                                                                                                                Color Theme Displays the hexadecimal code for the theme’s color. Clicking this field displays a color picker. Either enter the hexadecimal code for the color to be used for this theme, or select a color using the color picker.
                                                                                                                                                                Title Page The HTML Title tag for this theme.

                                                                                                                                                                For example: https://demo2.etadirect.oracle.com

                                                                                                                                                                Copyright Copyright information. The text should contain placeholders for {YEAR} and {VERSION} that will be automatically replaced to current year and major version. Example: © 2003-{YEAR} Oracle Corporation. All rights reserved. Version {VERSION}. The maximum length of this string is 255 characters.
                                                                                                                                                                Big (logo) Select the logo in .png format. This logo is used with screens of width 1024 and more, or between 320 and 768.
                                                                                                                                                                Small (logo) Select the logo in .png format. This logo is used in other cases within Core Manage and Mobility.
                                                                                                                                                                Login (logo) Select the logo in .png format. This logo is used in the login portal.

                                                                                                                                                              Add a Travel Area

                                                                                                                                                              Travel areas define the maximum allowed travel territory for a company and can contain groupings of work zones. Typically, companies have at least one high-level travel area listed.

                                                                                                                                                              1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                                                                                              2. In the General section, click Work Zones.

                                                                                                                                                              3. Click Travel Areas.

                                                                                                                                                                The Travel Areas screen appears.

                                                                                                                                                              4. Click Add travel area.

                                                                                                                                                                The Add travel area pop-up window appears.

                                                                                                                                                              5. Fill up the following fields:

                                                                                                                                                                Field Description
                                                                                                                                                                Name Name of the travel area.
                                                                                                                                                                Label Your company specific unique identifier for the area.
                                                                                                                                                              6. Click OK.

                                                                                                                                                                The Travel Areas screen appears.

                                                                                                                                                              7. Click Work Zones.

                                                                                                                                                                The Work Zones screen appears.

                                                                                                                                                              8. Click Recalculate activities.

                                                                                                                                                                All existing activities are recalculated to adjust the modifications.

                                                                                                                                                              Integrating with Other Applications

                                                                                                                                                              Your organization may have different software applications to take care of different business aspects. You can integrate those applications so that when an event occurs in one application, the appropriate changes are performed automatically in the other application. You can integrate applications in two ways: through Integration Cloud Service (ICS) and through REST APIs.

                                                                                                                                                              Integrating using ICS

                                                                                                                                                              When you use ICS, you create an integration point in Oracle Field Service Cloud. When an event occurs in Oracle Field Service Cloud, it is sent to the appropriate application through ICS. For example, a company in the manufacturing sector may have an ERP application to take care of their stocks. The company can integrate the ERP application with Oracle Field Service Cloud, so that when a field technician installs or deinstalls an equipment, the stock is updated in both, Oracle Field Service Cloud and the ERP application.

                                                                                                                                                              Integrating using REST APIs

                                                                                                                                                              Use REST APIs to integrate third-party applications such as mobile apps. To let a mobile app access REST APIs on behalf of a user, you use the OAuth 2.0 authentication. To use OAuth 2.0 authentication, you must register the client application with Oracle Field Service Cloud. Then, your client application requests an access token from Oracle Field Service Cloud or other external token service providers such as, Oracle Identity Cloud Service. The client application then sends the token to the API that you want to access.

                                                                                                                                                                Integrate Using ICS

                                                                                                                                                                Your organization may have different software applications to take care of different business aspects. You can integrate those applications so that when an event occurs in one application, the appropriate changes are performed automatically in the other application. For example, a company in the manufacturing sector may have an ERP application to take care of their stocks. The company can integrate the ERP application with Oracle Field Service Cloud, so that when a field technician installs or deinstalls an equipment, the stock is updated in both, Oracle Field Service Cloud and the ERP application. One of the ways with which you can integrate the applications is through Integration Cloud Service (ICS). When you use ICS, you create an integration point in Oracle Field Service Cloud. When an event occurs in Oracle Field Service Cloud, it is sent to the appropriate application through ICS.

                                                                                                                                                                Note: Configure this integration only if you want to send events or data from Oracle Field Service Cloud to ICS.
                                                                                                                                                                1. Log in to Oracle Field Service Cloud.

                                                                                                                                                                2. Click Configuration > Integration Cloud Service (ICS).

                                                                                                                                                                  The Integration Cloud Service (ICS) screen appears.
                                                                                                                                                                3. To add a new integration, follow these steps:

                                                                                                                                                                  1. Click Add new.

                                                                                                                                                                    The Add Integration Cloud Service (ICS) Access dialog opens.
                                                                                                                                                                  2. Add a name or description for the application for which you are creating the integration in the End Point Label field.

                                                                                                                                                                    If you are using multiple instances of an application, such as Production and Testing, you can create multiple access points for the application.
                                                                                                                                                                  3. Add the host name of the application for which you are creating the integration in the ICS Domain field.

                                                                                                                                                                    For example, if the URL is “https://integration-a12345.integration.us2.oraclecloud.com/integration/flowsvc/ofsccloudadapter/NAME/v01/" then ICS Domain is: “integration-a12345.integration.us2.oraclecloud.com”.
                                                                                                                                                                  4. Add the user name of the ICS user in the ICS Username field.

                                                                                                                                                                    This user must exist in ICS and have permissions to access the integration endpoint.
                                                                                                                                                                  5. Add the password for the user name in the ICS Password and Confirm Password fields.

                                                                                                                                                                    The user name and the password are used to authenticate with ICS when Oracle Field Service Cloud starts sending events to ICS.
                                                                                                                                                                  6. Click Add.

                                                                                                                                                                    The integration details appear on the Integration Cloud Service (ICS) screen. Next, you must log in to ICS to add the connection details and map the required fields.
                                                                                                                                                                4. To modify an integration, follow these steps:

                                                                                                                                                                  1. On the Integration Cloud Service (ICS) screen, click Modify for the end-point that you want to modify.

                                                                                                                                                                    The Edit Integration Cloud Service (ICS) Access dialog opens.
                                                                                                                                                                  2. Edit the fields as required.

                                                                                                                                                                    You can edit all the fields, except for ICS Domain.
                                                                                                                                                                  3. Click Submit.

                                                                                                                                                                5. To delete an integration, on the Integration Cloud Service (ICS) screen, click Delete.

                                                                                                                                                                  The application stops sending events and updates to ICS.

                                                                                                                                                                  Integrating Using REST APIs

                                                                                                                                                                  Oracle Field Service Cloud supports OAuth 2.0 authentication for API access. Use OAuth 2.0 authentication to let third-party applications such as a mobile app access REST APIs on behalf of a user. To use OAuth 2.0 authentication, you must register the client application with Oracle Field Service Cloud. Then, your client application requests an access token from Oracle Field Service Cloud or other external token service providers such as, Oracle Identity Cloud Service. The client application then sends the token to the API that you want to access.

                                                                                                                                                                  Oracle Field Service Cloud supports the following types of token service:
                                                                                                                                                                  • OFSC Token Service: The client application uses Oracle Field Service Token service to obtain an OAuth2 access token and authenticate with the APIs. OFSC token service supports two types of authentication:

                                                                                                                                                                    • Client Credentials: Authentication using client credentials is primarily used for back-end to back-end integration. For example, an application that requires pushing data to Oracle Field Service Cloud.

                                                                                                                                                                    • JWT Assertion: JWT assertion authentication can be used for back-end to back-end integration or for mobile applications. The Access Token generated using assertion flow may include the user identity, and Oracle Field Service Cloud performs actions as that user. The advantage of using assertion flow is that user's password is not shared with Oracle Field Service Cloud. When you use this type of authentication, the public key of the third-party application is imported into the Application entity and the third-party application can make API calls using its private key.

                                                                                                                                                                  • External Token Service: The client application uses an external token service such as Oracle Identity Cloud Service to obtain an OAuth 2.0 access token and authenticate with the APIs.

                                                                                                                                                                  • Oracle Identity Cloud Service: The client application uses Oracle Identity Cloud Service to obtain an OAuth 2.0 access token and authenticate with the REST APIs. You can upload the signing certificate for Oracle Identity Cloud Service and then configure Oracle Identity Cloud Service to issue OAuth2 Access Tokens. See the Oracle Identity Cloud Service documentation for information about where to get the signing certificate: https://docs.oracle.com/en/cloud/paas/identity-cloud/index.html.

                                                                                                                                                                  Use the following details to configure Oracle Identity Cloud Service:
                                                                                                                                                                  • Primary audience: <your Oracle Field Service Cloud instance name>. For example, ‘ofsc-x1111'

                                                                                                                                                                  • Scope: The scope name must begin with a slash ( / ), followed by the application ID that you created in Oracle Field Service Cloud. For example, if the application ID is 'new_app' then the Scope is '/new_app'.

                                                                                                                                                                  After filling in these details, note down the client_id and client_secret of the application.
                                                                                                                                                                  Integrating applications using REST APIs includes the following steps:
                                                                                                                                                                  1. Register the OAuth client application.

                                                                                                                                                                  2. Configure the authentication.

                                                                                                                                                                  3. Enable access to specific APIs for your application.

                                                                                                                                                                  For more information about calling REST APIs from third-party applications, see the REST API for Field Service Cloud guide.

                                                                                                                                                                    Create an Application

                                                                                                                                                                    If you want to call REST or SOAP APIs from a third-party application, you must register the third-party application by adding it on the Application screen in Oracle Field Service Cloud.

                                                                                                                                                                    1. Click Configuration > Applications.

                                                                                                                                                                      The Applications screen appears.
                                                                                                                                                                    2. Click the plus icon, add the following details, and then click Submit:

                                                                                                                                                                      Field Name Description
                                                                                                                                                                      Application Name Name of the third-party application that you want to register.
                                                                                                                                                                      Application ID A unique ID of the application.
                                                                                                                                                                    3. On the Applications screen, click the application that you want to register on the left pane and complete the following fields:

                                                                                                                                                                      Field Name Description
                                                                                                                                                                      Application general info section
                                                                                                                                                                      Application Name Name of the third-party application that you want to register. This field is populated automatically.
                                                                                                                                                                      Application ID A unique ID for the application. This field is populated automatically.
                                                                                                                                                                      Active Status of the Application. Inactive Applications do not authenticate or authorize anyone. When you make an active Application inactive, previously-issued access tokens do not work.
                                                                                                                                                                      Token Service Type of token service or identity provider the Application uses. Default is OFSC.
                                                                                                                                                                    4. Select the authentication service using the following fields:

                                                                                                                                                                      Field name Description
                                                                                                                                                                      Authentication settings section
                                                                                                                                                                      Authenticate using Client ID/ Client Secret Select this check box to authenticate the application using client ID and client secret. Click Show Client ID/Client secret to view the client ID and client secret.
                                                                                                                                                                      Client ID The client ID for the third-party application. This ID is automatically generated.
                                                                                                                                                                      Client Secret/Show Secret The client secret for the third-party application. This information is automatically generated.
                                                                                                                                                                      Authenticate using JWT assertion Select this check box to authenticate the application using JWT assertion.
                                                                                                                                                                      Authenticate using external access token Select this check box to authenticate the application using an external access token. This field is displayed if you select External for Token service.
                                                                                                                                                                      Client Certificate/Upload The certificate signed by the private key of the Application. If this is absent, you cannot use OAuth2 JWT Assertion authentication. Click Upload to upload the certificate.
                                                                                                                                                                    5. Select specific APIs for your application using the following fields:

                                                                                                                                                                      Field name Description
                                                                                                                                                                      API Access section
                                                                                                                                                                      Add new Click to add new APIs. The Add API access dialog appears. Select the APIs you want to add and click Submit.
                                                                                                                                                                      Available methods The list of the API methods available for the corresponding API. Click the menu to modify the fields or methods and to remove access to the API.
                                                                                                                                                                      Available entities The list of entities that the users of the current Application have access to. This option is available only for Core API and Metadata API fields.
                                                                                                                                                                      Available resource fields/ Available activity fields/ Available inventory fields/ Available service requests fields/ Available user fields The list of the fields available for the corresponding API. Clicking this opens the layout structure screen, where you can select the fields that the users of the current Application will be able to use to set or update using the API. This screen functions as a context layout structure screen where the fields and their visibilities are set.
                                                                                                                                                                      Remove access Removes access to this API. Users that have access to this Application cannot use the corresponding APIs anymore.
                                                                                                                                                                    6. Add any access restrictions using the following fields:

                                                                                                                                                                      Field name Description
                                                                                                                                                                      Additional restrictions section:
                                                                                                                                                                      Visible resources The resources that are visible to the Application. The Application performs actions only on the resource tree nodes that are included in this setting. If no resources are specified, the Application has access to entire resource tree. Click the pencil icon to select the resources that are visible to this Application.
                                                                                                                                                                      Allow access only for certain IP addresses The IP addresses that can access the current application. Add the IP address in the box.
                                                                                                                                                                      The following table describes how the Visible resources field works:

                                                                                                                                                                      Visibility restrictions Behavior
                                                                                                                                                                      Empty When a user is authenticated on behalf of this Application, their location in the resource tree is used for visibility restrictions. The Application cannot authorize itself, it can only authorize users.
                                                                                                                                                                      Present When a user is authenticated on behalf of this Application, an intersection (not union) of their location in the resource tree and the application visibility restrictions are used for visibility restrictions.

                                                                                                                                                                      Activity Booking

                                                                                                                                                                      Configuring Activity Booking

                                                                                                                                                                      When a technician performs an activity at the customer's premises, the customer may enquire about the possibility to perform another job for them on a different day. The technician must be able to collect the information about the new job, create an activity, and schedule it right away. To book an activity, the technician must also have the ability to check the available capacity for that specific date and time. This situation is handled by the Activity Booking option in Mobility. You must configure the activity booking context properly to get the most accurate and precise capacity calculation. The Book new activity option is configured in the Mobility section of the Screen Configuration screen.

                                                                                                                                                                      Accessed via the Mobility application, the feature of allows a user to create an activity in a specified capacity bucket and time slot, which will be then routed on a general basis. To be able to book an activity, the quota must be available in the selected capacity bucket on the selected date and time slot for a specific capacity category. As soon as the activity is booked, the capacity required for its performance is subtracted from the available capacity and added to the used capacity. The used capacity is compared to the quota values to make sure that orders for new activities are accepted only when the capacity is still available. Аs having capacity information up-to-date is crucial for the functionality, Activity Booking is available only in the online mode.

                                                                                                                                                                      Create a Layout for Booking an Activity

                                                                                                                                                                      Use the Book new activity option in the Mobility section of the Screen Configuration screen to create a layout for booking an activity.

                                                                                                                                                                      1. Click Configuration > User Types.

                                                                                                                                                                      2. Select the user type for which you want to add a layout for booking a new activity.

                                                                                                                                                                      3. In the Access settings section of the General tab, select the Allow access via Mobility check box.

                                                                                                                                                                      4. Expand the Mobility section and click Book new activity.

                                                                                                                                                                        The Visual Form Editor opens.
                                                                                                                                                                      5. Drag-and-drop the fields that you want on the Book new activity screen.

                                                                                                                                                                        You must have Activity type (aworktype) field. However, you cannot add file type of fields or properties, tabs, and the Time slot field.
                                                                                                                                                                      6. Select the visibility settings for all the fields.

                                                                                                                                                                      7. Click Submit.

                                                                                                                                                                        The layout is saved.

                                                                                                                                                                      Activity Type Constraints

                                                                                                                                                                      The activity booking function applies a number of constraints on certain activity types.

                                                                                                                                                                      Some activity types determine whether at all an activity can be booked, while others affect the configuration of different properties on the context. The list of activity types is available in the Activity Types screen. Click Configuration > Activity Types to access the Activity Types screen. Describe only those activity type constraints and conditions that apply equally to all the activity types that you want to be available for booking.

                                                                                                                                                                      Support of Time Slots

                                                                                                                                                                      You must enable the Support of time slots option for each activity type that is to be considered for booking.

                                                                                                                                                                      To select this option, click Configuration > Activity Types. On the Activity Types screen, select the type of activity that you want to be considered for booking. Open the activity, select Support of time slots, and click Update.

                                                                                                                                                                      Calculate Travel

                                                                                                                                                                      If you enable the Calculate travel feature for the activities to be booked, then the capacity calculation will additionally consider all fields and properties in the Activity travel stats fields.

                                                                                                                                                                      To select the Calculate travel feature, click Configuration > Activity Types. On the Activity Types screen, open the activity type for which you want to add the feature. Select the Calculate travel check box and click Update. When you select this feature, you must add all the fields that you have selected for the Activity travel stats fields in the Statistics screen to the Book new activity context layout and set the visibility as Mandatory.

                                                                                                                                                                      Calculate Activity Duration Using Statistics

                                                                                                                                                                      If you enable the Calculate activity duration using statistics feature for the activities to be booked, then the capacity calculation will additionally consider all fields and properties in the Activity duration stats fields.

                                                                                                                                                                      To select the Calculate activity duration using statistics feature, click Configuration > Activity Types. On the Activity Types screen, open the activity type for which you want to add the feature. Select the Calculate activity duration using statistics check box and click Update. When you select this feature, you must add all the fields that you have selected for the Activity duration stats fields field in the Statistics screen to the Book new activity context layout and set the visibility as Mandatory.

                                                                                                                                                                      Support of Work Zones

                                                                                                                                                                      You must enable work zone support for booking activities. If you have enabled work zones support, at both, the company level and the activity level for the corresponding activity types, all fields from the work zone key are considered for capacity calculation.

                                                                                                                                                                      To enable work zone support at the company level, click Configuration > Business Rules. Select Work Zone support in the General section. To select this option at the activity level, click Configuration > Activity Types. On the Activity Types screen, select the type of activity that you want to be considered for booking. Open the activity, select Support of work zones, and click Update. Click Configuration > Work Zones and note down the field selected for Work Zone Key. Add this field with a Mandatory visibility in the Book new activity context layout.

                                                                                                                                                                      Support of Work Skills

                                                                                                                                                                      You must enable work skill support for booking activities. If you have enabled work skill support, at both, the company level and the activity level for the corresponding activity types, all fields from the work skill conditions are considered for capacity calculation.

                                                                                                                                                                      To enable work skill support at the company level, click Configuration > Business Rules. Select Work Skill support in the General section. To select this option at the activity level, click Configuration > Activity Types. On the Activity Types screen, select the type of activity that you want to be considered for booking. Open the activity, select Support of work skills, and click Update. Click Configuration > Work Skills and click Work skill conditions. Open the work skill that you want to be considered for booking and note down the work skill conditions. Add these field with a Mandatory visibility in the Book new activity context layout.

                                                                                                                                                                      Schedule Booked Activity Context

                                                                                                                                                                      The Schedule booked activity context defines the layout of the Time Slot screen. While the time slot selection widget is pre-configured and cannot be changed, all other details of the booked activity can be specified in the Schedule booked activity context.

                                                                                                                                                                      The following restrictions apply to the context configuration:
                                                                                                                                                                      • You can add only read-only visibility condition for activities or properties on the context layout.

                                                                                                                                                                      • You cannot create tabs in the Schedule booked activity context.

                                                                                                                                                                      Otherwise, there are no special constraints, as opposed to the Book new activity context. The Schedule booked activity context is available in the Mobility section of the Screen Configuration screen.

                                                                                                                                                                      Error Messages

                                                                                                                                                                      This section provides the list of possible errors and the corresponding messages the user may encounter while booking activities.

                                                                                                                                                                      Missing Context Error

                                                                                                                                                                      If at least one of the two contexts ('Book new activity', 'Schedule booked activity') is not added before using the Activity Booking functionality, the message: Form is misconfigured. Context layout missing appears. Depending on which context is missing, the error is shown so, you can access the corresponding screens.

                                                                                                                                                                      Validation Errors

                                                                                                                                                                      If any of the mandatory fields is empty on the booking activity contexts ('Book new activity', 'Schedule booked activity'), the validation message, Validation failed, please review your form is shown. If a time slot has not been selected on the Time Slot screen, the activity is not booked and the message, Validation failed, please review your form. Time slot is not selected is displayed.

                                                                                                                                                                      Capacity Calculation Errors

                                                                                                                                                                      Capacity is not calculated in the following cases:
                                                                                                                                                                      • Data entered in the previous step (creating booked activity) is insufficient.

                                                                                                                                                                      • A configuration has not been properly performed.

                                                                                                                                                                      • There is no available capacity that matches with the activity parameters.

                                                                                                                                                                      The possible error messages that may occur at the capacity calculation stage, that is after submitting information entered in the booking activity form are as follows:
                                                                                                                                                                      • Work skills support is disabled at the company level.

                                                                                                                                                                      • Work skills are not supported by this type of activity.

                                                                                                                                                                      • Capacity category cannot be determined using the given activity fields.

                                                                                                                                                                      • The selected activity type is inactive.

                                                                                                                                                                      • Work zone cannot be determined by the given activity fields.

                                                                                                                                                                      • Field or property that is required for work zone 'location' value calculation is missing.

                                                                                                                                                                      • Time slots are not supported by this type of activity.

                                                                                                                                                                      • Field or property that is required for the duration estimation is missing.

                                                                                                                                                                      • Field or property required for travel estimation is missing.

                                                                                                                                                                      • The matching buckets found do not have the required quota for booking this activity.

                                                                                                                                                                      • Unable to find appropriate quota bucket for this activity.

                                                                                                                                                                      About User Types

                                                                                                                                                                      Use user types to manage permissions and restrictions for all users. You can create user types for your business that correspond to your existing business roles. Each user type has a profile that defines security and display permissions, such as the user’s login method, the ability to use certain functions, and access to menu items and properties. They may also include custom screen context layouts.

                                                                                                                                                                      You assign each user exactly one user type. You can add or change user types at any time, and delete those which are no longer needed. You can also copy existing user type configurations to make new ones. This makes it easy to create multiple user types that share similar configuration settings.

                                                                                                                                                                      For each screen or function that you want to make available for a given user type, you set the visibility to Read-only or Read-write. If you do not define a visibility value, that screen or function is hidden for that user type. Access to a screen or tab automatically includes access to the actions on that screen.

                                                                                                                                                                        User-Type Settings

                                                                                                                                                                        A new user type has to be configured according to its business role. Similarly, alterations of a business role may require modifications of the corresponding user-type settings.

                                                                                                                                                                        Changes to a user type assigned to Oracle Field Service Core Manage Cloud Service users are applied shortly after they are saved on the User Types screen. Changes to a user type assigned to Oracle Field Service Mobility Cloud Service users are applied after the next synchronization.

                                                                                                                                                                        User-type settings fall into the following four categories, which appear as tabs:

                                                                                                                                                                        • General

                                                                                                                                                                          These basic settings define the user-type options with respect to resource types and other users, as well as the user-type access to the system and to its functions.

                                                                                                                                                                        • Screen configuration

                                                                                                                                                                          These settings define the screens, windows, pop-up windows and other elements visible to a certain user type and supports the context layout editor where the content, arrangement and visibilities of each context are set.

                                                                                                                                                                        • Restrictions and Filters

                                                                                                                                                                          These settings define the restrictions on the activities and fields that are visible to the users of the current type.

                                                                                                                                                                          Understanding User-Type Settings

                                                                                                                                                                          User-type settings define options such as access to the system, its functions, and to certain APIs. It also controls the visibility of screens, windows, pop-up windows, activities, and fields.

                                                                                                                                                                          General tab settings
                                                                                                                                                                          The following table describes the fields available on the General tab:

                                                                                                                                                                          Setting Description Notes
                                                                                                                                                                          User Type Info
                                                                                                                                                                          Label A unique identifier of the user type. Required. No spaces are allowed.
                                                                                                                                                                          Name A user-friendly name that describes the user type. Required. Spaces are allowed.
                                                                                                                                                                          Active Indicates whether the user type is active. Activating a user type simply makes it assignable to users. Inactive user types still apply to users that are assigned to them.
                                                                                                                                                                          Login Policy Defines the user authentication method to Oracle Field Service Cloud
                                                                                                                                                                          Assigned resource types Shows the resource types available for this user type. To change the assigned resource types, click the pencil icon. You cannot remove a resource type if any users are currently assigned to this user type.
                                                                                                                                                                          Can create users of the following user types Lists the user types that this user type can create.

                                                                                                                                                                          Inactive user types are greyed out and cannot be created by this user type.

                                                                                                                                                                          Permission to create user types is reciprocal. For example, if user type Manager can create user type Dispatcher, user type Dispatcher can create user type Manager.

                                                                                                                                                                          To change the user types this user type can create, click the pencil icon.

                                                                                                                                                                          Can be created by users of following user types Lists the user types that can create the current user type.

                                                                                                                                                                          Inactive user types are greyed out.

                                                                                                                                                                          Permission to create user types is reciprocal. For example, if user type Manager can create user type Dispatcher, user type Dispatcher can create user type Manager.

                                                                                                                                                                          Access Settings
                                                                                                                                                                          Allow access to web application When enabled, users of the current type can use the unified Core Application to manage dispatch operations.
                                                                                                                                                                          Use Legacy Manage for Dispatch operations When enabled, users of the current type can use the legacy Manage and Mobility interfaces, as it used to be in the earlier versions. However, even those users will be presented with the unified login screen. This functionality is deprecated and is not recommended for new implementations.
                                                                                                                                                                          Note: If you have cleared the previous check box and want to clear this check box as well, ensure that you have configured the Configuration screen for Mobility and the User Types screen for any other User Type. If you have not configured these screens, you cannot get back the access to Legacy Manage.
                                                                                                                                                                          Allow legacy access via API using user login and password. This option is used for backward compatibility only. For new integrations configure the access using application credentials. When enabled, users of the current type can use the system via APIs. This option is used for backward compatibility only. New customers must configure the access using application credentials.
                                                                                                                                                                          Allow access via installed application for Android When enabled, users can access the application through the Oracle Field Service Cloud Mobile for Android application.
                                                                                                                                                                          Allow access via installed application for iOS When enabled, users can access the application through the Oracle Field Service Cloud Mobile for iOS application.
                                                                                                                                                                          API access permissions are configured using selected application Select the Application that provides API permissions to the users of the selected user type. Create an Application and configure API permissions in the Applications screen.
                                                                                                                                                                          Permissions
                                                                                                                                                                          Maps When enabled, the user can access the Map View on the Activities, Quota, and Resource Work Zones screens.
                                                                                                                                                                          Use real-time traffic data When enabled, the check box, Show Traffic is shown on the Map view. Users can select the Show Traffic check box to view the current traffic data in the selected route. This option is not available for Contingent Workers (set as ‘Resource is a Contingent Worker’ parameter in Manage, under Configuration, and Resource Types).

                                                                                                                                                                          The real-time update is available to users of Oracle Field Service Enterprise Cloud when Oracle Field Service Standard Map Cloud Service with Google Maps or Baidu Maps is part of your subscription.

                                                                                                                                                                          Enable GPS Telemetry When enabled, the user's geopositioning information can be collected directly from the user's device.
                                                                                                                                                                          Allow access to required inventory When enabled, the Mobility user is able to access the Required inventory functionality and perform all related actions. The Required Inventory permission for Manage is implemented as visibility for the Required Inventory tab in the Add activity or Activity details context.
                                                                                                                                                                          Enable Smart Location alerts When enabled, the user can receive alerts on their mobile device whenever any compliance issues have occurred and have been identified by the SmartLocation module.
                                                                                                                                                                          Parts Catalog When enabled, the user can search for particular spare parts in the catalog using the standard search function.
                                                                                                                                                                          Collaboration
                                                                                                                                                                          Collaboration Select the checkbox to view the collaboration settings.
                                                                                                                                                                          Allow inventory move via chat In addition to chat functions, allows the user to transfer inventory via chat.
                                                                                                                                                                          Allow image sharing via chat In addition to chat functions, allows the user to share images via chat.
                                                                                                                                                                          Allow activity move via chat In addition to chat functions, allows the user to transfer activities via chat.
                                                                                                                                                                          Allow Video Call via Collaboration When enabled, the setting allows the user type to access the Video Chat functionality.
                                                                                                                                                                          • Requires a subscription to Oracle Field Service Enterprise Cloud.

                                                                                                                                                                          • Video Chat is available in North America. Other regions are planned in future releases.

                                                                                                                                                                          • If the resource type is a Contingent worker, then the Video Chat is not available even if the setting is selected.

                                                                                                                                                                          Activity Management
                                                                                                                                                                          Allow activity move between resources When enabled, the user can move an activity from one resource to another
                                                                                                                                                                          Allow activity move from non-scheduled pool to scheduled one When enabled, the user can convert a non-scheduled activity to one that is scheduled.
                                                                                                                                                                          Allow access to non-scheduled pool When enabled, the user can access the pool of non-scheduled activities and perform actions to them.
                                                                                                                                                                          Allow activity reorder inside the route When enabled, the user can change the position of an activity in the route.
                                                                                                                                                                          Allow activity reschedule/move to non-scheduled pool When enabled, the user can move an activity to a different date or make it non-scheduled.
                                                                                                                                                                          Allow activity deletion When enabled, the user can delete an activity together with canceling it. Otherwise, a canceled activity remains in the system.
                                                                                                                                                                          Ignore work zones/work skills mismatch on activity move When enabled, the user can move activities to resources with work zones and/or work skills not matching those of the activity.
                                                                                                                                                                          Allow repeating/mass activity creation When enabled, the user can create mass and repeating activities.
                                                                                                                                                                          Allow action time adjustment in legacy Manage When enabled, the user can manually adjust the time of activity actions in the legacy Manage application. Otherwise, the action time is logged as the current time.
                                                                                                                                                                          Display the remaining Activity Time When enabled, the activity work progress countdown is displayed.
                                                                                                                                                                          Allow next activity selection on Complete When enabled, the user completing an activity can select the next activity to start. Otherwise, only the next activity in the route can be started.
                                                                                                                                                                          Display and allow adjustment of remaining Travel Time When enabled, the Travel Time Countdown is displayed and the user can adjust travel time in Mobility. Available values are: 5, 10, 15, 30, 45 minutes, 1 hour, 1 hour and 30 minutes, 2, 3, 4 and 8 hours.
                                                                                                                                                                          Suggest activity by location When enabled, displays the number of activities that are assigned in the same location for a technician. This information is displayed above the Start button on the Resource Info screen. The distance within which a location falls is determined by the Resource is considered to be at the activity location if the distance to it is less than X meters setting in the SmartLocation/GPS section on the Business Rules screen.
                                                                                                                                                                          Resource Management
                                                                                                                                                                          Allow changes in working calendar When enabled, the user can modify the working calendar of the resource.
                                                                                                                                                                          Allow to move resources between Organization Units When enabled, the user can move the resources to different organizations in the resource tree.
                                                                                                                                                                          Screen Configuration Tab
                                                                                                                                                                          The following table describes the fields available on the Screen Configuration tab:

                                                                                                                                                                          Setting Description Notes
                                                                                                                                                                          Application screens Includes the contexts used in the Core Application
                                                                                                                                                                          Legacy Manage Includes the contexts used in the legacy Core Manage
                                                                                                                                                                          Collaboration and Identifiers Includes the contexts used in Collaboration and the entity identifier contexts
                                                                                                                                                                          Plugin API Includes the plug-ins used with activity, inventory, and resource properties
                                                                                                                                                                          Restrictions and Filters Tab
                                                                                                                                                                          The following table describes the fields available on the Restrictions and Filters tab:

                                                                                                                                                                          Setting Description Notes
                                                                                                                                                                          Hide all activities Determines if the users will or will not be able to access any activities in the system after a certain time. When enabled, the administrator also has to set the time after which the activities are to be hidden.
                                                                                                                                                                          Hide activity fields Determines if the users will or will not be able to access certain activity fields after a certain time. The fields to be hidden are defined in the Field restrictions context accessible by clicking the Activity fields link. When enabled, the administrator also has to set the time after which the activity fields are to be hidden.
                                                                                                                                                                          Filters restricting visible activities Defines whether the users of the current type will be able to view the entire routes or only some activities. Setting the visibility restrictions requires proper configuration of the applicable filters.

                                                                                                                                                                            Screen-Configuration Settings

                                                                                                                                                                            Screen-configuration settings define the screens, windows, pop-up windows and other elements visible to a certain user type. They also support the context layout editor, in which the content, arrangement, and visibilities of each context are set.

                                                                                                                                                                            The Screen configuration tab contains the list of all contexts available in Oracle Field Service Cloud. All contexts are split into three sections that correspond to their location in the system:

                                                                                                                                                                            • Application screens: The contexts used in Core Application.

                                                                                                                                                                            • Legacy Manage: The contexts used in the legacy Oracle Field Service Core Manage Cloud Service.

                                                                                                                                                                            • Collaboration and Identifiers: The contexts used in Oracle Field Service Collaboration Cloud Service and the entity identifier contexts.

                                                                                                                                                                            The Screen configuration tab is active when the Allow access to web application option is enabled for the user type. The same settings also influence the availability of the screen configuration sections. If the Allow access to web application option is disabled for the user type, the Application screens section will be collapsed and inactive.

                                                                                                                                                                            The list of settings is organized hierarchically and shows the relationships between different contexts. All context names are links to the context layout editor screens. The following figure shows the Screen configuration tab:


                                                                                                                                                                            This figure shows the Screen Configuration tab, which includes settings that are organized hierarchically and shows relationships between different contexts.
                                                                                                                                                                            Note: Any screen configuration settings made in the Application screens section are retained if the Allow access to web application option is disabled afterwards for the user type. If access is allowed again, the same screen configuration settings apply again for the user type.

                                                                                                                                                                            Links to new (not edited) or empty contexts are shown in red, while links to edited contexts are shown in blue. If you remove all elements from a context, its link color changes from blue to red to indicate that the context is now empty. If you create a user type without copying the settings of another user type, all contexts are shown in red. When configuring screens for a user type, the Context layout structure page provides an indicator to show that a property is configured. When you add an item to the Layout structure column of the page, it appears in red until you add visibility to the field. After you define a visibility for the item, it is no longer highlighted in the Layout structure column.

                                                                                                                                                                            Note: You can add or remove the Collaboration Group and Operator of Helpdesk properties from the context layout structure of the Add/Edit User context for each user type. After you update the properties in the Add/Edit User context, select a user from the Resource Settings, Users screen and click Modify to view the updated properties.

                                                                                                                                                                            The hierarchy of contexts starts from the Main menu items context defining the main menu items available or unavailable for the current user type. The configuration of the Main menu items context defines the menu bar elements visible or hidden for a particular user type. Each menu bar element opens a certain screen and, therefore, provides access to its functionality. If a certain screen has been made available for a user type, all users of such type will have access to the entire functionality implemented on that screen. Similarly, if a screen has been made unavailable for a user type, all users of such type will not be able to use the functionality implemented on that screen.

                                                                                                                                                                            Changing the visibility of the Message Scenarios menu item to Read-write allows the user to view and edit all elements of a message scenario. With the Read-only visibility, they can only view them. The following figure shows the Settings tab of the View scenarios step, which was set as read-only in the Screen Configuration screen:


                                                                                                                                                                            This figure shows the Settings tab of the View scenarios step, which was set as read-only in the Screen Configuration screen.
                                                                                                                                                                            The links to contexts are connected with arrows showing the relation between the contexts. Hovering the mouse over an arrow highlights it in red for better visibility. The following figure shows a highlighted arrow, which means you are hovering the mouse over that arrow:
                                                                                                                                                                            This figure shows a highlighted arrow, which means you are hovering the mouse over that arrow.

                                                                                                                                                                            Click a link to open the Context layout structure screen and define the fields and actions of the context, and their visibilities for the user type. You can copy a context layout to another user type if the other user type uses the same or slightly modified layout of the same screen or window. For this purpose, the Context layout structure screen has the Copy to button, which opens the list of all user types in the system.

                                                                                                                                                                            For the form type contexts, the link leads to the Visual Form Editor screen, allowing the user to edit context layouts in an easier and more transparent manner. You can delete the default Read/Write visibility on the sections and tabs in the Visual Form Editor. Additionally, Read/Write visibility is not added after migration. When the visibility condition for a property is mandatory and the property value is cleared, the value is set to null and the visibility is selected.

                                                                                                                                                                            If the screen configuration of the current user type is shared with one or more other user types, such user types will be preselected in the Copy to list. If the user type selected in the list shares its screen configuration with other user types, such user types will be automatically selected as well. The current context layout will be applied to the selected user types. In this case it replaces the previous context layout settings, if any.

                                                                                                                                                                            When a context layout is copied for another user type, only the current context is copied while the rest of the screen configuration remains unchanged. When a context layout is copied, two separate identical context layouts are created. Each layout can be edited independently causing no changes in the other one. However, if the destination screen configuration is shared with other user types, the current context layout will be copied to all user types sharing the same screen configuration.

                                                                                                                                                                            Context layout copying is confirmed with the message, Layout has been successfully copied. Closing the Context layout structure screen returns the user to the User types screen.

                                                                                                                                                                            The Collaboration and Identifiers section contains the contexts falling under two groups:

                                                                                                                                                                            • Identifiers: Includes the identifier contexts for activity, inventory and service request

                                                                                                                                                                            • Collaboration: Includes all contexts related to the Collaboration module, as shown in the following figure:


                                                                                                                                                                            This figure shows the Collaboration and Identifiers section with its contexts and relations.
                                                                                                                                                                            Note: Text formatting such as modifying the text size, bold/non-bold, italic, or coloring or properties is not supported.
                                                                                                                                                                            If the user type is created as a copy of another user type and the screen configuration is shared, the message, Screen configuration shared with: {User type} displays on the Screen configuration tab. When the screen configuration is shared with another user type, the same set of settings is used for both user types, and both user types refer to them simultaneously. A shared screen configuration means that all context layouts and their visibilities are similar for all user types sharing them. If the screen configuration is modified for one of the user types, the same changes will immediately apply to all other user types sharing it.

                                                                                                                                                                            The Change action link allows selecting a different source of the screen configuration for the current user type. In this case the current user type is dissociated from the shared screen configuration. Three options are available:

                                                                                                                                                                            • Use Screen configuration of {User Type}: The screen configuration is shared with one or more user types. Only one set of configuration settings exists, and any changes of the screen configuration of one of the user types causes similar changes of the screen configuration of other user types. In this case sharing is inherited, that is, if the user type selected for sharing already shares its screen configuration with other user types, the same screen configuration will be used for all of them. The note underneath advises the user about the user types sharing the same screen configuration.

                                                                                                                                                                            • Create Screen configuration as copy of {User Type}: the screen configuration is copied from another user type. In this case two independent sets of settings are created, and any changes apply only to the user type for which they are made. The note underneath advises the user about the user type whose screen configuration will be copied.

                                                                                                                                                                            • Create empty Screen configuration: The current screen configuration is cleared. Only the settings of the current user type are cleared. If the screen configuration had been shared with or copied from another user type previously, it is disconnected and a new independent screen configuration is created. The note underneath advises the user that only the screen configuration of the current user type will be cleared.

                                                                                                                                                                            If a user type has an independent screen configuration, it can be replaced with another by sharing or copying the screen configuration of another user type. All user types with screen configurations not related to those of other user types have the Copy/share screen configuration link. This link leads to the same screen configuration options as are offered for changing the current screen configuration. However, as the current screen configuration is not used elsewhere in the system, selecting any option will remove it permanently. The note warns the administrator that the current configuration will be lost.

                                                                                                                                                                              Configure the Header

                                                                                                                                                                              The application includes two distinct themes—a classic style and a modern style. The modern style theme is called Vanilla and it displays icons in the header region for the most frequently accessed screens. It has a menu to the left of the screen, which provides access to the remaining screens. The classic style theme displays tabs with text. The following image shows the Vanilla theme user interface with the left pane, hamburger icon, and the header regions marked 1, 2, and 3 respectively:
                                                                                                                                                                              This figure shows the Vanilla theme user interface.
                                                                                                                                                                              This topic describes how to configure the header.

                                                                                                                                                                              1. Click Configuration > Themes..

                                                                                                                                                                              2. Click Set default in the Vanilla theme row.

                                                                                                                                                                              3. Click Configuration > User Types.

                                                                                                                                                                              4. Select the user type that you want to modify (you can also select the one that you are using). Click Screen configuration.

                                                                                                                                                                              5. Click Main menu items.

                                                                                                                                                                                The Context layout structure screen appears.
                                                                                                                                                                              6. In the Dispatch section, reorder the menu items as required.

                                                                                                                                                                                The first item in the list becomes the Home page and gets the Home icon. The application displays only four icons before the ‘|’ marker, regardless of the number of items you place in the Dispatch section.
                                                                                                                                                                              7. Click Close and refresh the browser.

                                                                                                                                                                                The newly configured theme and the icons appear.

                                                                                                                                                                                Configure the Main Menu

                                                                                                                                                                                You can configure the main menu using the Main Menu screen context. The configuration affects the Supervisor view. The Manage, Maps, Calendars, and Resources menus are pre-configured for this layout and are available by default.

                                                                                                                                                                                1. Log in to the application.

                                                                                                                                                                                2. Click Configuration > User Types.

                                                                                                                                                                                3. Select a User Type for which you want to add the main menu. Click Screen configuration.

                                                                                                                                                                                4. Click Application screens > Main menu.

                                                                                                                                                                                  The context layout structure screen appears.
                                                                                                                                                                                5. Click the Click to add button and add any item that you want to display on the main menu.

                                                                                                                                                                                  New layout items are available as Read-Only.
                                                                                                                                                                                6. Click X at the top-right corner.

                                                                                                                                                                                7. Sign out and sign in to the application.

                                                                                                                                                                                  The newly configured main menu appears.

                                                                                                                                                                                  Edit Context Layout Screen

                                                                                                                                                                                  Use the Context Layout Screen to configure the fields that appear on the application screens.

                                                                                                                                                                                  1. Click Configuration > User Types.

                                                                                                                                                                                    The User Types screen appears.
                                                                                                                                                                                  2. In the left pane, select the user type for which you want to edit the context layout.

                                                                                                                                                                                  3. Click Screen Configuration.

                                                                                                                                                                                  4. Expand Application screens, Legacy Manage, Collaboration and Identifiers, or Plugin API. For example, click Application screens.

                                                                                                                                                                                  5. Click the screen for which you want to edit the context layout. For example, click Add activity/Activity details.

                                                                                                                                                                                    The Context layout structure for the selected screen and the selected user type opens. On this screen, you can add or edit properties, actions, tabs, columns, and sections. Properties appear as fields and actions appear as buttons. Tabs, columns, and sections define the structure of the layout. You can also configure visibilities to properties and define the conditions under which the visibility settings are effective.
                                                                                                                                                                                  6. Follow these steps to add a property:

                                                                                                                                                                                    1. Click the Click to add button.

                                                                                                                                                                                      The Add property dialog appears.
                                                                                                                                                                                    2. Select the property that you want to add and click OK.

                                                                                                                                                                                  7. Follow these steps to configure the visibility for the newly added property:

                                                                                                                                                                                    1. Click Add new visibility.

                                                                                                                                                                                      The [property name] visibility screen appears.
                                                                                                                                                                                    2. Select the access mode.

                                                                                                                                                                                    3. To add a condition for visibility, click Add new condition.

                                                                                                                                                                                      The corresponding fields appear.
                                                                                                                                                                                    4. Select a property, select the condition, select the additional condition if available, and then click the tick mark.

                                                                                                                                                                                      For example, the condition can be equal, not in, empty, and so on. If you have selected the property as activity status and the condition as equal, the additional condition can be suspended and pending.
                                                                                                                                                                                  8. Follow these steps to add an action:

                                                                                                                                                                                    1. Click the Click to add button under Actions.

                                                                                                                                                                                      The Add action dialog appears.
                                                                                                                                                                                    2. Select the action that you want to add and click OK.

                                                                                                                                                                                      After adding the action, set visibility for it. Visibility is not set by default, so you must configure it for every field and action that you add.
                                                                                                                                                                                  9. Follow these steps to add a tab:

                                                                                                                                                                                    1. Click a property and click Group.

                                                                                                                                                                                      The Add to group dialog appears.
                                                                                                                                                                                    2. Enter the name of the group.

                                                                                                                                                                                    3. Select one of the following options and then click OK:

                                                                                                                                                                                      Option Description
                                                                                                                                                                                      Section Select this option to start a new section or block.
                                                                                                                                                                                      Tab Select this option to start a new tab with the name provided earlier.
                                                                                                                                                                                      Predefined tab Select this option to include a predefined tab. Select the tab from the Tab type drop-down list. Predefined tabs are the tabs available in the application by default.
                                                                                                                                                                                  10. Follow these steps to add a column or section:

                                                                                                                                                                                    1. Select a property or an action and click Add marker.

                                                                                                                                                                                    2. In the Add marker dialog, select End of column or End of section.

                                                                                                                                                                                    3. Click OK.

                                                                                                                                                                                    Visual Form Editor

                                                                                                                                                                                    The Visual Form Editor is used to configure context layouts in the Mobility application for each user type. After configuring the context layout, you must select the Allow access to web application check box for each user type to view the context in the application.

                                                                                                                                                                                    The editor enables you to configure the following entities, when available, for each form:
                                                                                                                                                                                    • Fields: Displays properties that are relevant for the selected context or that belong to a specific entity.

                                                                                                                                                                                    • Actions: Displays actions that are relevant for the selected context or that belong to a specific entity.

                                                                                                                                                                                    • Special elements: The following options are available:

                                                                                                                                                                                      • Add Text: Enables you to add text to the section of a form.

                                                                                                                                                                                      • Section and Tab: Contains the selected fields and actions from the Fields and Actions objects.

                                                                                                                                                                                    You can define Visibility settings for each object of the form. Values with identical visibility settings are grouped and the grouping happens after the settings are saved. Also, using the Translations section, you can translate the text that displays on each object to any of the supported languages.
                                                                                                                                                                                    By default, the Visual form editor displays the following elements:
                                                                                                                                                                                    • Header: Displays the selected actions from the Actions object.

                                                                                                                                                                                    • Footer: Contains the default Dismiss and Submit buttons for a form. You can only define visibility settings for the Submit button.

                                                                                                                                                                                    • Submit and Dismiss buttons: Indicates the button that is visible for all forms.

                                                                                                                                                                                      Default Values and Validation Rules

                                                                                                                                                                                      You can configure string and integer fields to include default values and validation rules. This helps when your business needs some fields to be populated by default and some fields to be calculated automatically, based on the value of another field. The fields that you configure here are applicable only to Oracle Field Service Mobility Cloud Service. Further, this function is allowed only for `string`, `int` and `enum` custom properties.

                                                                                                                                                                                      You can configure the fields and properties in the following ways:
                                                                                                                                                                                      • Add a default value: A default value is an auto-calculated value of a field or property. This value is based on certain business rules and is dependent on the values of other fields and properties. The default value is represented as formula filled in the corresponding configuration field. For example, when a property is filled with a specific value, another property is filled with the current date or time.

                                                                                                                                                                                      • Add a validation rule: A validation rule is a restriction based on certain business rules and is dependent on the values of other fields and properties. A validation rule is represented as a formula filled in the corresponding configuration field. For example, the value entered for a property (property A) falls within a specific range (between values of property B and property C).

                                                                                                                                                                                      • Use a formula for configuring the visibility and the value visibility: The formula is based on certain business rules and is dependent on the values of other fields and properties. The formula for the visibility of the field and its value must be filled in the corresponding configuration field. It's possible to transform an existing visibility configured through a constructor to a formula. The application uses this formula for calculating visibility as the primary path and visibility from the constructor as the secondary path.

                                                                                                                                                                                      Note: If a default expression is configured with an empty value for a read-only field or property, it will NOT be hidden on the screen. This means, the user will see the field or property label on the screen, but it will not have any value.
                                                                                                                                                                                      Limitations
                                                                                                                                                                                      The following limitations exist for default values and validation rules:
                                                                                                                                                                                      • Work skills and work zones are not supported for default values and validation rules.

                                                                                                                                                                                      • Custom properties with the "Geolocation element" GUI is not supported for default values and validation rules.

                                                                                                                                                                                      • The following limitations are applied to the configuration of expressions:
                                                                                                                                                                                        • 2000 characters for configuring default values

                                                                                                                                                                                        • 2000 characters for configuring validation rules

                                                                                                                                                                                        • 4950 characters for configuring visibility as an expression

                                                                                                                                                                                      Supported Screens
                                                                                                                                                                                      You can configure default values and validation rules only on the following Activity and Inventory screens for Oracle Field Service Mobility Cloud Service:

                                                                                                                                                                                      Screen Label
                                                                                                                                                                                      Edit/View activity mobile_activity_details
                                                                                                                                                                                      Cancel activity mobile_cancel_activity
                                                                                                                                                                                      Delay activity mobile_delay_activity
                                                                                                                                                                                      End activity mobile_end_activity
                                                                                                                                                                                      End prework mobile_end_prework
                                                                                                                                                                                      Not done activity mobile_notdone_activity
                                                                                                                                                                                      Add activity mobile_set_activity
                                                                                                                                                                                      Start activity mobile_start_activity
                                                                                                                                                                                      Start prework mobile_start_prework
                                                                                                                                                                                      Suspend activity mobile_suspend_activity
                                                                                                                                                                                      Add/Details inventory mobile_add_details_inventory
                                                                                                                                                                                      Deinstall inventory mobile_deinstall_inventory
                                                                                                                                                                                      Install inventory mobile_install_inventory
                                                                                                                                                                                      Send/View activity request mobile_activity_request
                                                                                                                                                                                      Add/View inventory request mobile_inventory_request
                                                                                                                                                                                      Add/View resource request mobile_provider_request
                                                                                                                                                                                      Edit Required Inventory mobile_add_edit_required_inventory
                                                                                                                                                                                      Supported Fields
                                                                                                                                                                                      You can configure default values and validation rules only on the following fields:

                                                                                                                                                                                      Property name Property label Type Entity GUI
                                                                                                                                                                                      Account Number customer_number field activity text
                                                                                                                                                                                      Activity Type aworktype field activity combobox
                                                                                                                                                                                      Address caddress field activity text
                                                                                                                                                                                      Appointment Number appt_number field activity text
                                                                                                                                                                                      City ccity field activity text
                                                                                                                                                                                      Customer Email cemail field activity email
                                                                                                                                                                                      Customer Mobile Number ccell field activity phone
                                                                                                                                                                                      Customer Phone Number cphone field activity phone
                                                                                                                                                                                      Duration length field activity text
                                                                                                                                                                                      Inventory Type invtype field inventory combobox
                                                                                                                                                                                      Name cname field activity text
                                                                                                                                                                                      Points apoints field activity text
                                                                                                                                                                                      Quantity quantity field inventory text
                                                                                                                                                                                      Serial Number invsn field inventory text
                                                                                                                                                                                      Service Request Type srtype field service request combobox
                                                                                                                                                                                      State cstate field activity text
                                                                                                                                                                                      Time Slot time_slot field activity text
                                                                                                                                                                                      ZIP/Postal Code czip field activity text
                                                                                                                                                                                      Calculation Order
                                                                                                                                                                                      The result of a configured expression is calculated in the following order:
                                                                                                                                                                                      1. Value (Number, String, variable, function, expressing in round brackets)

                                                                                                                                                                                      2. Special operators (BETWEEN, IN, CONTAINS)

                                                                                                                                                                                      3. Unary operators (NOT, -)

                                                                                                                                                                                      4. Multiplicative operators (*, /)

                                                                                                                                                                                      5. Additive operators (+, -)

                                                                                                                                                                                      6. Comparison operators (=, <>, <, >, <=, >=)

                                                                                                                                                                                      7. Logical operator AND

                                                                                                                                                                                      8. Logical operator OR

                                                                                                                                                                                        Configure Default Values and Validation Rules

                                                                                                                                                                                        When you configure fields on the Visual Form Editor, you can add a default value or a validation rule for fields and properties, and use formulas to configure visibility and visibility value.

                                                                                                                                                                                        1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                                                                                                                        2. Click User Types in the Users, Security, Integration section.

                                                                                                                                                                                        3. Click Screen configuration.

                                                                                                                                                                                        4. Expand the Application screens section and click the screen that you want to modify.

                                                                                                                                                                                        5. Select the field for which you want to add a default value or a validation rule. If the field is not added to the context layout, drag it from the left pane and drop it in the right pane.

                                                                                                                                                                                          By default, the field is assigned with a visibility of Read-Write (RW).
                                                                                                                                                                                        6. Follow these steps to change the default visibility:

                                                                                                                                                                                          1. Click Add New in the Visibility section.

                                                                                                                                                                                            The Visibility settings dialog appears.
                                                                                                                                                                                          2. Select the required option in the Access mode section.

                                                                                                                                                                                          3. If you want to change the visibility based on a condition, add it in the Conditions section.

                                                                                                                                                                                            You can add a formula to determine the condition for visibility. The conditions entered here if any, are given priority over visibility inherited by the field or property.
                                                                                                                                                                                            Note: When setting up the visibility for a specific property, you cannot create a visibility condition based on the property itself. For example, suppose that you want to set up the visibility of the property "City" as Read Write. You cannot set up a condition such as "City contains New York".
                                                                                                                                                                                        7. Follow these steps to add a default value or a validation rule:

                                                                                                                                                                                          1. Expand the Default value and validation section.

                                                                                                                                                                                          2. Enter a value in the Default value field.

                                                                                                                                                                                          3. Enter a validation for the value in the Validation field.

                                                                                                                                                                                            You can use arithmetic operators, comparison operators, or functions to form the validation rule.
                                                                                                                                                                                        8. Click Save.

                                                                                                                                                                                          The details are saved and enforced when a user edits the corresponding screen the next time.
                                                                                                                                                                                          Language Expressions

                                                                                                                                                                                          The language containing operators and functions is used for configuring default values, validation rules, and visibility of fields and properties.

                                                                                                                                                                                          The language is described in the following table:

                                                                                                                                                                                          Argument Description Usage Pattern Use in
                                                                                                                                                                                          Default rules Validation rules Visibility
                                                                                                                                                                                          Variables, entities, and properties
                                                                                                                                                                                          this Value of current element this > 100 No Yes No
                                                                                                                                                                                          entity.property entity.`label` Value of property of entity. Use for wrapping labels with spaces. activity.aworktype = 1 Yes Yes Yes
                                                                                                                                                                                          White spaces and comments
                                                                                                                                                                                          [space], [tab], [line break] Assuming multiple white spaces as single space. Assuming white space as separator. this + 100 Yes Yes Yes
                                                                                                                                                                                          /* Any comment */ Assuming comment block as single white space. activity.PROP_A1 > 77 /* 77 - is predefined parameter */ Yes Yes Yes
                                                                                                                                                                                          Logical operators (case sensitive, operands will be converted to Boolean)
                                                                                                                                                                                          OR Logical disjunction a OR b Yes Yes Yes
                                                                                                                                                                                          AND Logical conjunction a AND b Yes Yes Yes
                                                                                                                                                                                          Unary operators
                                                                                                                                                                                          NOT Logical not (operand will be converted to Boolean) NOT (a AND b) Yes Yes Yes
                                                                                                                                                                                          Arithmetic inversion (operand will be converted to Number) - activity.PROP_A1

                                                                                                                                                                                          this * (- activity.PROP_A2)

                                                                                                                                                                                          Yes Yes Yes
                                                                                                                                                                                          Equal Comparison Operators (case sensitive for Strings). Operands will be converted to String
                                                                                                                                                                                          = Equal to a = b Yes Yes Yes
                                                                                                                                                                                          <> Not equal a <> b Yes Yes Yes
                                                                                                                                                                                          Comparison Operators (case sensitive for Strings). Use toNumber() for arguments if number comparison is needed.
                                                                                                                                                                                          < Less than a < b Yes Yes Yes
                                                                                                                                                                                          > Greater than a > b Yes Yes Yes
                                                                                                                                                                                          <= Less than or equal to a <= b Yes Yes Yes
                                                                                                                                                                                          >= Greater than or equal to a >= b Yes Yes Yes
                                                                                                                                                                                          Arithmetic Operators (all operands will be converted to Number, any arithmetic operation with Infinity/NaN returns Infinity/NaN)
                                                                                                                                                                                          + Addition a + b Yes Yes Yes
                                                                                                                                                                                          - Subtraction a — b Yes Yes Yes
                                                                                                                                                                                          * Multiplication a * b Yes Yes Yes
                                                                                                                                                                                          / Division

                                                                                                                                                                                          Division by zero: Division by zero returns infinity, which will be converted to "" (empty string).

                                                                                                                                                                                          a / b Yes Yes Yes
                                                                                                                                                                                          Additional Operators (case sensitive)
                                                                                                                                                                                          string CONTAINS needle Return true if `string` contains `needle` (operands will be converted to String) this CONTAINS "A0"

                                                                                                                                                                                          activity.PROP_A1 CONTAINS concat("-", this)

                                                                                                                                                                                          NOT activity.PROP_A2 CONTAINS activity.PROP_A3

                                                                                                                                                                                          Yes Yes Yes
                                                                                                                                                                                          value IN (value1[, value2, [, valueN]]) maximum 1000 arguments Returns true if `value` is equal to any `value1`...`valueN` (value will be converted to String) this IN (1, 2, 3, 4)

                                                                                                                                                                                          activity.PROP_A1 IN ("value1", "value2")

                                                                                                                                                                                          NOT activity.PROP_A2 IN ("value1")

                                                                                                                                                                                          Yes Yes Yes
                                                                                                                                                                                          value BETWEEN (min, max) Returns true if `value` is equal to `min`, equal to `max` or between them. The same as: value >= min AND value <= max (operands will be converted to Number) 1 BETWEEN (0, 100)

                                                                                                                                                                                          NOT 200 BETWEEN (99, 100)

                                                                                                                                                                                          Yes Yes Yes
                                                                                                                                                                                          Functions (case sensitive)
                                                                                                                                                                                          if(condition, value1, value2) Function which returns value1 argument if condition is true and value2 argument if condition is false (condition will be converted to Boolean) if(activity.PROP_A1 > 0, 1, 0) Yes No No
                                                                                                                                                                                          now(string) Returns current date in required format. View corresponding section for details now("yyyy-MM-dd HH:mm:ss") Yes No No
                                                                                                                                                                                          toNumber(value) Formatting object to required number format toNumber(activity.PROP_A1)

                                                                                                                                                                                          toNumber("123.45")

                                                                                                                                                                                          Yes Yes Yes
                                                                                                                                                                                          toString(value) Formatting object to string toString(activity.PROP_A1)

                                                                                                                                                                                          toString(123.45)

                                                                                                                                                                                          Yes Yes Yes
                                                                                                                                                                                          concat(string1, string2 [... ,stringN]]) maximum 20 arguments Concatenate strings (all operands will be converted to String) concat(this, "#", activity.PROP_A1) Yes Yes Yes
                                                                                                                                                                                          toLowerCase(string) String to lower case (operand will be converted to String) toLowerCase(activity.PROP_A1) Yes Yes Yes
                                                                                                                                                                                          toUpperCase(string) String to upper case (operand will be converted to String) toUpperCase(activity.PROP_A1) Yes Yes Yes
                                                                                                                                                                                          empty(value) Returns true if `value` is undefined or empty string or NaN or Boolean, false in all other cases empty(activity.PROP_A1)

                                                                                                                                                                                          NOT empty(activity.PROP_A2)

                                                                                                                                                                                          Yes Yes Yes
                                                                                                                                                                                            Type Conversion
                                                                                                                                                                                            The following table describes the types of data used for validation rules and the way the application converts them:

                                                                                                                                                                                            Number String Boolean NaN Infinity Undefined
                                                                                                                                                                                            Number 123 = “123”

                                                                                                                                                                                            1.5 >= “1.5”

                                                                                                                                                                                            1 = True

                                                                                                                                                                                            0 = True

                                                                                                                                                                                            -10 = True

                                                                                                                                                                                            String “ ” — 0

                                                                                                                                                                                            “1asda” = 0

                                                                                                                                                                                            “1.5” = 1.5

                                                                                                                                                                                            “2,3” = 0

                                                                                                                                                                                            “ ” = False

                                                                                                                                                                                            ”anything” = True

                                                                                                                                                                                            “0” = True

                                                                                                                                                                                            “False” = True

                                                                                                                                                                                            Boolean True = 1

                                                                                                                                                                                            False = 0

                                                                                                                                                                                            True = “True”

                                                                                                                                                                                            False = “ ”

                                                                                                                                                                                            NaN NaN “ ” False
                                                                                                                                                                                            Infinity Infinity “ ” False
                                                                                                                                                                                            Undefined 0 “ ” False
                                                                                                                                                                                              Examples of Validation Rules
                                                                                                                                                                                              Scenario 1: Report Gas Consumption

                                                                                                                                                                                              Suppose that an activity contains information about gas consumption. There are three of types of consumption: predicted, actual, and removed. The 'predicted' amount of consumed gas is saved in the activity. When a Field Technician chooses to report the actual information about the consumed gas, then the difference between 'actual' and 'predicted' data should be calculated automatically. If the actual consumption exceeds the predicted consumption by more than 20 cubic meters and the conditions of the gas counter are good, then the 'Reporting notes' property is displayed.

                                                                                                                                                                                              Prerequisites: Let us assume that 'Predicted gas consumption', 'Actual gas consumption', 'Difference', 'Counter is not broken' and 'Reporting notes' string-type properties are configured in the application. And, there is the 'Counter is not broken' integer property with a check box on the GUI.

                                                                                                                                                                                              Configuration: The expressions should be configured in the 'Default' field for the 'Difference' property. It should look like: activity.real_consumption-activity.predicted_consumption

                                                                                                                                                                                              Visibility: The visibility for 'Reporting notes' should be set as Read/Write with the same formula as the condition: (activity.real_consumption-activity.predicted_consumption) >20 AND activity.counter_conditions=1

                                                                                                                                                                                              Scenario 2: Checking Ratio

                                                                                                                                                                                              A Field Technician has to enter the Upstream Signal-to-Noise ratio to complete an activity (it is mandatory). The range should not be seen and it has to be anywhere between +32 to 52 dBmV. When the Field Technician enters a value of 55dBmV, which is not in the range then the Field Technician should know that is not the range and has to try again. The Field Technician measures again and enters 51dBmV, which is in the range allowing to complete the activity.

                                                                                                                                                                                              Prerequisites: Let's assume that the Upstream Signal-to-Noise' property is configured in the application. The 'Upstream Signal-to-Noise' property is configured on the 'Complete activity' screen as mandatory.

                                                                                                                                                                                              Configuration: The expression should be configured in the 'Validation' field for the 'Upstream Signal-to-Noise' property. It should: this BETWEEN (32,52).

                                                                                                                                                                                              Custom error message should be configured in the corresponding field to be displayed to the tech in Mobility.

                                                                                                                                                                                                Processing Rules

                                                                                                                                                                                                This topic describes the rules based on which default values and validation rules are calculated.

                                                                                                                                                                                                Default value rules

                                                                                                                                                                                                For read-only fields and properties:
                                                                                                                                                                                                • Default value is always calculated for empty fields and properties.

                                                                                                                                                                                                • Default value is not calculated for not-empty fields and properties.

                                                                                                                                                                                                • Default value is recalculated every time a dependent field is changed, where dependent fields are fields used in the formula of the rule.

                                                                                                                                                                                                For read-write or mandatory fields and properties:
                                                                                                                                                                                                • Default value is always calculated for empty fields and properties.

                                                                                                                                                                                                • Default value is not calculated for not-empty fields and properties.

                                                                                                                                                                                                • Default value is recalculated every time a dependent field is changed, when the dependent fields are used in the formula of the rule.

                                                                                                                                                                                                • Default value stops calculated once it's manually changed on the open form.

                                                                                                                                                                                                • Default value stops calculated once it's submitted with not-empty value.

                                                                                                                                                                                                • Default value is not calculated for fields and properties with pre-filled values defined on the Action links configuration screen.

                                                                                                                                                                                                Validation rules

                                                                                                                                                                                                For read-only fields and properties: Not applicable to read-only fields

                                                                                                                                                                                                For read-write fields and properties:
                                                                                                                                                                                                • Are used for read-write fields and properties.

                                                                                                                                                                                                • If a value of certain field or property does not match with the configured validation rule, then the form can be submitted.

                                                                                                                                                                                                For Mandatory fields and properties:
                                                                                                                                                                                                • Are applicable to mandatory fields and properties.

                                                                                                                                                                                                • If a value of certain field or property does not match with the configured validation rule, then the form cannot be submitted.

                                                                                                                                                                                                • For fields and properties where validation rules are not configured, the 'NOT empty' rule is automatically applied (current logic).

                                                                                                                                                                                                • For fields and properties where validation rules are configured, the system uses that rules on the submission of the form. That is, if a validation rule states that a mandatory field 'IS empty' then it will be submitted without value.

                                                                                                                                                                                                Conflict Resolution
                                                                                                                                                                                                If a configured visibility rule contradicts with a configured default value, the following rules are applied to resolve the conflict:
                                                                                                                                                                                                • for read-only fields and properties, the form is submitted and warning a message is displayed

                                                                                                                                                                                                • for mandatory fields and properties, the form is not submitted and an error message is displayed

                                                                                                                                                                                                  Syntax

                                                                                                                                                                                                  This topic describes the syntax to configure the default values and validation rules.

                                                                                                                                                                                                  Naming of entities: Use the following names to relate custom properties and product fields to required entities:
                                                                                                                                                                                                  • activity - prefix for activity properties/fields. Example: activity.PROP_A1

                                                                                                                                                                                                  • inventory - prefix for inventory properties/fields. Example: inventory.PROP_I1

                                                                                                                                                                                                  • resource - prefix for resource properties/fields. Example: resource.PROP_R1

                                                                                                                                                                                                  • user - prefix for user properties/fields. Example: user.PROP_U1

                                                                                                                                                                                                  • request - prefix for service request properties/fields. Example: sr.PROP_SR1

                                                                                                                                                                                                  Operators: All operators are case sensitive and must be used in the configuration as described in the "Language expression" section. Examples:
                                                                                                                                                                                                  • activity.PROP_A1 = 100 OR activity.PROP_A1 = 200 - is correct

                                                                                                                                                                                                  • activity.PROP_A1 = 100 or activity.PROP_A1 = 200 - is incorrect

                                                                                                                                                                                                  Numbers and Strings: String-type values must be used in expressions in double or single quotes. For example:
                                                                                                                                                                                                  • "string expression"

                                                                                                                                                                                                  • "12345"

                                                                                                                                                                                                  • 'single'

                                                                                                                                                                                                  Escape sequences: The allowed string escape sequences are:
                                                                                                                                                                                                  • \' – To escape ‘ within single quoted string

                                                                                                                                                                                                  • \" – To escape “ within double quoted string

                                                                                                                                                                                                  • \\ – To escape the backslash

                                                                                                                                                                                                  • \n – To add line breaks between string

                                                                                                                                                                                                  • \t – To add tab space

                                                                                                                                                                                                  To ignore other escape sequences:
                                                                                                                                                                                                  • \radasd => radasd

                                                                                                                                                                                                  • \x123 => x123

                                                                                                                                                                                                  To use integers in expressions, use them without of quotes. For example:
                                                                                                                                                                                                  • 12345

                                                                                                                                                                                                  • 6

                                                                                                                                                                                                  Use float numbers with a dot as delimiter and without quotes. For example: 2.86954.

                                                                                                                                                                                                  Properties and Fields

                                                                                                                                                                                                  For properties and fields, the entity is given first followed by the label, and separated by a dot. If the label contains anything other than a to z, A to Z, 0 to 9, or underscore, wrap it with backticks. Examples:
                                                                                                                                                                                                  • activity.PROP_A1 = 25

                                                                                                                                                                                                  • activity.PROP_A1 <> activity.PROP_A2

                                                                                                                                                                                                  • inventory.`LABEL WITH SPACE`

                                                                                                                                                                                                    Functions

                                                                                                                                                                                                    Use functions in expressions in the format where the function's name is given first followed by the expression in brackets. Separate arguments by comma. All functions are case sensitive and must be used in the configuration as described in the "Language expression" topic.

                                                                                                                                                                                                    Examples for functions are:
                                                                                                                                                                                                    • toNumber("string expression")

                                                                                                                                                                                                    • if(activity.PROP_A1 > 10, 15, activity.PROP_A2 + 200)

                                                                                                                                                                                                    • toLowerCase(activity.PROP_A1) - is correct

                                                                                                                                                                                                    • tolowercase(activity.PROP_A1) - is incorrect

                                                                                                                                                                                                    ‘if’ function

                                                                                                                                                                                                    The function consists of three attributes separated by comma. The function represents the following logic: if attribute 1 is <some value> then set <some value> else set <other value>. Example: if (activity.PROP_A1 > 0,15, activity.PROP_A2+200)

                                                                                                                                                                                                    `now` function
                                                                                                                                                                                                    The function can be set as now("format") where the format can be DATE, DATETIME, TIMESTAMP. Include the value of the format between double quotes, similar to strings. Examples:
                                                                                                                                                                                                    • DATE - now("yyyy/MM/dd")

                                                                                                                                                                                                    • DATETIME - now("yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss tt")

                                                                                                                                                                                                    • TIME - now("HH:mm:ss")

                                                                                                                                                                                                    `toNumber` and `toString` functions
                                                                                                                                                                                                    The rules described in the "Numbers and Strings" and "Properties and Fields" sections are applicable to the toNumber and toString functions. Examples:
                                                                                                                                                                                                    • toNumber("12345")

                                                                                                                                                                                                    • toNumber(activity.PROP_A1)

                                                                                                                                                                                                    • toString(1245)

                                                                                                                                                                                                    • toString(activity.PROP_A2)

                                                                                                                                                                                                    'concat' function
                                                                                                                                                                                                    The function can contain any number of operands separated by comma and placed in between brackets. Examples:
                                                                                                                                                                                                    • concat("abc", 15,"cde")

                                                                                                                                                                                                    • concat(activity.PROP_A1,activity_PROP_A2)

                                                                                                                                                                                                    `toLowerCase` and `toUpperCase` functions
                                                                                                                                                                                                    The functions are used to convert strings to lower or upper case. The functions contain only one operand placed in brackets. Examples:
                                                                                                                                                                                                    • toLowerCase("ABCD")

                                                                                                                                                                                                    • toLowerCase(activity.PROP_A1)

                                                                                                                                                                                                    • toUpperCase("abcd")

                                                                                                                                                                                                    • toUpperCase(activity.PROP_A1)

                                                                                                                                                                                                    'empty' function
                                                                                                                                                                                                    The function can be set with some field or property defined in brackets followed by the function. Examples:
                                                                                                                                                                                                    • empty(activity.PROP_A1)

                                                                                                                                                                                                    • if(empty(activity.PROP_A1),1000,activity.PROP_A2 +200)

                                                                                                                                                                                                    • NOT empty(activity.PROP_A1)

                                                                                                                                                                                                    Activity type groups
                                                                                                                                                                                                    You can configure a group of activity types for default values, validation rules, and visibility fields and properties. It is configured in the format of activity.awortype_group = "LABEL", where the value defining a label of an activity type group is included in double or single quotes. Examples:
                                                                                                                                                                                                    • activity.awortype_group = "internal"

                                                                                                                                                                                                    • activity.aworktype_group IN ('customer', 'maintenance')

                                                                                                                                                                                                      now Function Format

                                                                                                                                                                                                      The 'now' function returns the date and time in the resource time zone.

                                                                                                                                                                                                      You can configure the function according to the format given in the following table:

                                                                                                                                                                                                      Format Character Description Example
                                                                                                                                                                                                      d Day of the month, 2 digits 1 to 31
                                                                                                                                                                                                      dd Day of the month, 2 digits, with leading zeros 01 to 31
                                                                                                                                                                                                      H 24-hour format of an hour 0 through 23
                                                                                                                                                                                                      h 12-hour format of an hour 1 through 12
                                                                                                                                                                                                      HH 24-hour format of an hour, with leading zeros 00 through 23
                                                                                                                                                                                                      hh 12-hour format of an hour, with leading zeros 01 through 12
                                                                                                                                                                                                      M Numeric representation of a month 1 through 12
                                                                                                                                                                                                      m Minutes 0 to 59
                                                                                                                                                                                                      MM Numeric representation of a month, with leading zeros 01 through 12
                                                                                                                                                                                                      mm Minutes, with leading zeros 00 to 59
                                                                                                                                                                                                      s Seconds 0 through 59
                                                                                                                                                                                                      ss Seconds, with leading zeros 00 through 59
                                                                                                                                                                                                      t Short uppercase Ante meridiem and Post meridiem A or P
                                                                                                                                                                                                      tt Uppercase Ante meridiem and Post meridiem AM or PM
                                                                                                                                                                                                      yy A two digit representation of a year, with leading zeros 17
                                                                                                                                                                                                      yyyy A full numeric representation of a year, 4 digits 2017
                                                                                                                                                                                                      z The time zone offset +0 to ±11
                                                                                                                                                                                                      zz The time zone offset, with a leading zero +00 to ±11
                                                                                                                                                                                                      zzz The full timezone offset, with a leading zero +00:00 to ±11:30
                                                                                                                                                                                                        Configure a Form Using Special Elements, Actions, and Fields
                                                                                                                                                                                                        Assume that you want to create a Edit/View Activity form for the context, Edit/View Activity that belongs to the user type, Administrator with the following objects:
                                                                                                                                                                                                        • Start and End actions.

                                                                                                                                                                                                        • Special element, Section

                                                                                                                                                                                                        • Name and Address fields.

                                                                                                                                                                                                        This example explains how to configure the entities, namely, fields, actions, and special elements for the form.
                                                                                                                                                                                                        Note: Properties configured on the Edit/View Activitycontext (also known as Activity Details screen) are ReadOnly, even if the property visibility is set to ReadWrite. To set the property visibility to ReadWrite, you must add the properties to a tab.
                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. Click Configuration, User Types in the Users and Security section.

                                                                                                                                                                                                          The existing users display in the left pane.
                                                                                                                                                                                                        2. Select Administrator from the left pane.

                                                                                                                                                                                                        3. Select the Screen Configuration tab.

                                                                                                                                                                                                        4. Expand Application screens and select Edit/View Activity.

                                                                                                                                                                                                          The Visual Form Editor displays.
                                                                                                                                                                                                        5. To add the special element, Section to the grid:

                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. Select Special Elements.

                                                                                                                                                                                                          2. Drag and drop Section to the grid to add a section to the form.

                                                                                                                                                                                                        6. To add Name and Address fields to the section:

                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. Drag and drop the Name property from the Fields section.

                                                                                                                                                                                                          2. Drag and drop the Address property from the Fields section.

                                                                                                                                                                                                        7. Click Save.

                                                                                                                                                                                                        8. To add the Start and End actions:

                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. Drag and drop the Start action to the header from the Actions section.

                                                                                                                                                                                                          2. Drag and drop the End action to the header from the Actions section.

                                                                                                                                                                                                        9. Click Save at the top of the form editor.

                                                                                                                                                                                                        After you configure the entities for a form, log in to the application and view the configured form.
                                                                                                                                                                                                        Note: Visibility of tabs is the aggregated result of the configured visibility conditions for the child elements (for example, property, text). The following rules apply:
                                                                                                                                                                                                        • The tab is visible and accessible, if at least one element is configured to be visible (for example, Read-write or Mandatory) or a Read-only element contains data.

                                                                                                                                                                                                        • The tab is not visible or accessible, if none of the configured elements is visible (for example, no Read-write or Mandatory property or Read-only element without data).

                                                                                                                                                                                                        • If a tab has all Read-Only elements, then the action links are shown. If at least one element in the tab is Read-Write or Mandatory, then the action links are not shown.

                                                                                                                                                                                                        • If a tab has been configured with visibility conditions, it will be displayed in accordance with those conditions ignoring inner elements.

                                                                                                                                                                                                          Restrictions and Filters Settings

                                                                                                                                                                                                          The Restrictions and Filters tab sets the restrictions on activities and fields visible to the users of the current type.

                                                                                                                                                                                                          The Restrictions and Filters tab has two sections:

                                                                                                                                                                                                          • Field restrictions

                                                                                                                                                                                                          • Filters restricting visible activities

                                                                                                                                                                                                          The Restrictions and Filters tab is shown in the following figure:


                                                                                                                                                                                                          This figure shows the Restrictions and Filters tab.

                                                                                                                                                                                                          Options in the Field restrictions section define whether all activities and/or certain activity fields are to be hidden from the users of the current user type. There are two options in this section:

                                                                                                                                                                                                          • Hide all activities: Determines if the users will or will not be able to access any activities in the system after a certain time. When the Hide all activities option is enabled, the administrator must set the time after which the activities are to be hidden. Two options are available:

                                                                                                                                                                                                            • starting tomorrow: When selected, all users of the current type will only be able to access today's activities

                                                                                                                                                                                                            • starting day after tomorrow: When selected, all users of the current type will only be able to access today's and tomorrow's activities. No activities beyond the selected time will be visible to these users.

                                                                                                                                                                                                          • Hide activity fields: Determines if the users will or will not be able to access certain activity fields after a certain time. The fields to be hidden are defined in the Field restrictions context accessible by clicking the activity fields link. When the Hide activity fields option is enabled, the administrator must set the time after which the activity fields are to be hidden. Two Hide all activity fields menu options are available:

                                                                                                                                                                                                            • starting tomorrow: When selected, all users of the current type will only be able to access the selected fields of today's activities

                                                                                                                                                                                                            • starting day after tomorrow: When selected, all users of the current type will only be able to access the selected fields of today's and tomorrow's activities. The restricted activity fields beyond the selected time will not be visible to these users.

                                                                                                                                                                                                          Options in the Filters restricting visible activities section define whether the users of the current type will be able to view entire routes or only some activities. Setting the visibility restrictions requires proper configuration of the applicable filters.

                                                                                                                                                                                                          To be used as a restriction on visible activities, a filter must be defined as applicable for activity in the Add Filter window. In addition, the Restriction on visible activities option must be selected. Clicking Add displays the User Types screen, where you can apply the current filter as a visibility restriction filter for the user type. The following figure shows the Add filter dialog with the Applicable for, Restriction on visible activities and the Go to User Types screen to apply the current filter as visibility restriction filter for user type fields highlighted:


                                                                                                                                                                                                          This figure shows the Add filter screen, where you can add a new filter.

                                                                                                                                                                                                          The filters you add then display in the list of available filters in the Restrictions and Filters tab of the user-type configuration.

                                                                                                                                                                                                          When a filter has been set for a user type, all users of such type will see only the activities defined in the filter settings according to the conditions set in the filter configuration.

                                                                                                                                                                                                          The User Types section of the filter does not apply when setting restrictions on visible activities. The User Types section is inactive only when the Restriction on visible activities option is selected. However, it is used in configuring the filter to be used on List/Time/Map/Daily screens. The following figure shows the Filters menu:


                                                                                                                                                                                                          This figure shows the Filters drop-down menu on the Dispatch screen.

                                                                                                                                                                                                          When the List/Time/Map/Daily option is selected, the User Types section becomes active. The note in the User Types section suggests that the List/Time/Map/Daily filter will be applied for selected user types.

                                                                                                                                                                                                          When a filter is defined as a filter for List/Time/Map/Daily for a user type, this filter will appear in the View window on the Activities and Daily screens for users of such type. The list will include only the filters configured as described above.

                                                                                                                                                                                                          Note: If the same filter is defined both as applicable for List/Time/Map/Daily and as a Restriction on visible activities, it works for two different groups of user types. The List/Time/Map/Daily filtering will be available for the user types selected in the same filter configuration window. However, the Restriction on visible activities will be set for the user types for which this filter is selected in the Restrictions and Filters settings.
                                                                                                                                                                                                            Adding Access Schedule Fields

                                                                                                                                                                                                            To access the Access Schedule fields, add the Access Schedule (access_schedule) and/or Access Hours (access_hours) fields to the appropriate display context. While Access Schedule can be added in Read-Only and Read-Write mode, Access Hours can only have the Read-Only visibility. In most of the contexts (including activity-related screens, lists and hints, with the only exception of Activity details) the Access Schedule field also includes Access Hours if it is calculated.

                                                                                                                                                                                                              Work with User Types

                                                                                                                                                                                                              Create a User Type

                                                                                                                                                                                                              Follow these steps to create a Oracle Field Service Cloud user type.

                                                                                                                                                                                                              You must be logged into Oracle Field Service Cloud as an administrator.
                                                                                                                                                                                                              When you create a user type that is not copied from an existing one, most of the options are disabled, and you must define the settings manually. When you use a copy, the new user type inherits all the settings from the copy.
                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. Access the User Types screen.

                                                                                                                                                                                                              2. Click the + icon at the upper left corner of the screen.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                The Add User Type window appears.

                                                                                                                                                                                                              3. Enter a Label for the user type.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                This is a unique string identifier of the user type.
                                                                                                                                                                                                              4. Enter a Name for the user type.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                This is a human-friendly name.
                                                                                                                                                                                                              5. Optionally, choose an existing user type to copy settings from.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. Choose an existing user type from the available list.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                2. Optionally, click Share screen configuration.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Choose this option if you want the new user type to have the same screen configuration options as the copied user type. If you change a shared screen configuration, the change will apply to all user types that use the configuration.
                                                                                                                                                                                                              6. Click OK

                                                                                                                                                                                                                The User Type Settings screen appears.

                                                                                                                                                                                                              7. Edit the user type values as necessary.

                                                                                                                                                                                                              8. Click Save.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                Changes to a user type assigned to manage users are applied shortly after they are saved. Changes to a user type assigned to Mobility users are applied after the next synchronization.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                Delete a User Type

                                                                                                                                                                                                                You can delete a user type only if there are no users assigned to it.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                You must be logged into Oracle Field Service Cloud as an administrator.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. Access the User Types screen.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                2. Select the user type you want to delete from the list.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                3. Click the - icon at the upper left corner of the screen.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                  The Confirm window opens.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                4. Click OK.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                  If the selected user type is assigned to any users, an error message displays indicating that the user type cannot be deleted. Else, the user type is deleted.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Exporting User Types

                                                                                                                                                                                                                  User types are exported together with all their settings, such as associated resource types, user types from which users can create or be created by the exported user type, permissions, context layouts, and filters.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                  The following actions are available on the Export user types window:

                                                                                                                                                                                                                  • Select all: Exports all user types existing in the application.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                  • Clear all: Clears any previously selected user types.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                  The search field at the top of the window allows you to filter the list by entering a search string. All items are exported under their labels. Clicking Export creates an XML file containing the data of the user types you selected. If you have not selected any user type, the error message Nothing to export displays.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Importing User Types

                                                                                                                                                                                                                    The system of user types can be imported from an XML file. An imported system replaces the existing user types system, if any.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                    The Import user types window allows you to select the XML file containing the user-types data. Import can process only XML files. If a file of any other type is selected, the import is rejected and an Import file type must be XML error message displays. Before importing a user type, the application checks to ensure that its entities (such as resource types, permissions, and context layout items) are valid.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Note: You cannot import your own user type. Your user type must be imported by a user of a different user type. For example, if your user type is Admin1, you cannot import it. You can create another user type Admin2, and Admin2 can import Admin1.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Validation messages are as follows:

                                                                                                                                                                                                                    • Successfully imported: The user type is imported successfully.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                    • Imported with warnings:

                                                                                                                                                                                                                      One or more entities is invalid, but the user type is imported.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    • Not imported: The user type is missing critical data and has not been imported.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                    During the import process, a progress window displays the following information:

                                                                                                                                                                                                                    • A number in the Import column means that the number of imported items differs from the number of validated items.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                    • A green check mark means that the number of validated items is identical to the number of imported items.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                    The User type import details window displays the details of all successfully imported user types, user types imported with warnings, and user types that were not imported.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Managing User Types

                                                                                                                                                                                                                      How you configure and manage user types and individual users is dependent upon user-type settings.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                      User-type settings affect the user-management process. You should consider the following points when configuring user types and individual users:

                                                                                                                                                                                                                      • These settings allow the user logging in under this user type to open the Users screen and manage users.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                      • A user having access to the Users screen can see the list of all users existing in the system. However, the user can modify only the users of types defined under Can create users of the following user types. Users of other types have no action links and cannot be included in group actions (that is, no check boxes are available to them).

                                                                                                                                                                                                                      • If no user types have been defined in the Can create users of the following user types section, the user can see the users list but cannot modify existing user settings or add new users.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                      • A user is always related to one or more resources. The choice of resources for creating a new user is affected, on one hand, by the Assigned resource types setting in the User Type configuration and, on the other hand, by the Users can be created at the level of this resource feature of the resource type.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                      • When creating a new user type, the User Type field contains the list of user types defined in the Can create users of the following user types field of the current user type.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Manage Users

                                                                                                                                                                                                                        You must first configure several user-type settings, so that a user type can create and manage other users.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. On the General tab, do the following:

                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. In Can create users of the following user types, select all the user types from which users can be created.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                          2. In Access settings, ensure that the Allow access via Manage option is enabled.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                        2. On the Screen configuration tab, do the following:

                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. Ensure that the Main menu items context includes the Users screen with the read-write visibility.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                          2. Ensure that the Company Configuration context includes the User Types screens with the read-write visibility.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Managing Your Own User Type

                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Any user can change his or her user type.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                          You can change your user type when you configure the My Display context layout so that it contains the User Type field with read-write visibility. However, the available options include only the user types defined in the Can create users of the following user types field of the current user type, and your own user type must be among the user types selected in the field. Otherwise, the User Type field appears as read-only, even when its visibility has been defined as read-write. The following figure shows the My Display screen that lets you change the user type:


                                                                                                                                                                                                                          This figure shows the My Display screen, which helps you manage your own user type.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Caution: Be very careful when changing your own user type. Your new user type might have different visibility and access settings that may make reverting to the previous user type impossible.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                            User Groups and User Permissions

                                                                                                                                                                                                                            User Groups and User Permissions are part of the tools used to manage Oracle Field Service Cloud Collaboration Cloud Service functionality settings.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                            User Groups are used to create roles, structure, and assign permissions. The user group list displays name and membership information, group description, and status. The User Permissions section provides a list of users that have access to Oracle Field Service Cloud Collaboration Cloud Service. For more information about User Groups and User Permissions, see the Oracle Field Service Cloud Collaboration Cloud Service User Guide.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Work Schedules

                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Create and Delete Work Schedules

                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Work schedules are templates made up of a combination of shifts (working time) and non-working times. When grouped as a work schedule, these shifts can be applied all at once to a bucket or to an individual resource.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                              2. In the General section, click Work Schedules.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                The Work Schedules screen appears.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                              3. Click Add work schedule.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                The Add work schedule window appears.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                              4. Enter a name and a unique label for the new work schedule.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                While the name must be representative of the work schedule time frame, there is no functional correlation between the name and the shifts that will be contained within the schedule.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                              5. Select the Active check box if you want the work schedule to be visible for assignment.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                              6. Click OK to save the work schedule.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                              7. To delete a work schedule, select the check box and click Delete.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Note: You cannot delete a work schedule if it is currently assigned to a resource. You must remove it from the resource or bucket first, and then delete it from the list.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Add Shifts to a Work Schedule

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                After you have created a work schedule, you can add the shifts and non-working times that will be included in the overall period of time.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                2. In the General section, click Work Schedules.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  The Work Schedules screen appears.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                3. Click Items to the right of the work schedule that you want to add a shift to.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  The shift list for the selected work schedule appears.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                4. Click Add Shift.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  The Add shift window appears.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                5. Click the Shift drop-down menu to view the available shifts.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                6. Select a Start date and End date for the period of time that this shift should be associated with the work schedule.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Leaving the End date field empty implies that the shift will be a part of the work schedule indefinitely.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                7. Add any comments for clarification or detail.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                8. Select one of the following options in the Repeats drop-down menu:

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  • Daily – Allows for inclusion of the shift such as every other day or every 3rd day. This option requires a value in the field labeled every _____ day(s).

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  • Everyday – The shift applies to everyday without exception.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  • Weekly – Allows for shifts that are used on a regular weekly pattern. Select the days that apply to this particular shift using the check boxes for the individual days. Indicate the frequency of this pattern weekly by adding a value to the every ____ weeks(s) field.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  • Yearly – Select a date range for the shift that will recur every year.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                9. Click OK to save the shift to the work schedule.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                10. Repeat the steps for each additional shift that you want to apply to this work schedule.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Add Non-Working Time to a Work Schedule

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  In addition to shifts, you may apply non-working time to certain work schedules. This could accommodate work schedules that include non-standard work time such as four-day workweeks or even holidays that occur on the same day every year. Keep in mind that many of the non-working reasons (illness, bereavement, etc.) tend to be used more frequently on a one-off basis for individual resources as days off occur.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  2. In the General section, click Work Schedules.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    The Work Schedules screen appears.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  3. Click Items to the right of the work schedule that you want to add non—working time to.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    The selected work schedule appears.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  4. Click Add non-working time.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    The Add non-working time window appears.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  5. Complete the following fields:

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    The following table describes the fields available on the Add non-working time screen:

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Field Description
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Shift Type Select from Regular or On Call depending on which shift type you want the non-working reason to be associated with.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Reason Select the applicable reason from the drop-down menu. This list is populated from entries in Company Settings, Non-Working Reasons.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Start Date | End Date Select the date range that this non-working will be valid for. Open-end dates imply that the non-working reason will be indefinitely associated with the work schedule.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Comments Enter any comments about the non-working reason. If Other is selected as a reason, then the Comments field becomes mandatory.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Repeats Select the appropriate option from the drop-down menu. Options are:
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    • Daily – Allows for inclusion of the shift such as every other day or every 3rd day. This option requires a value in the field labeled every _____ day(s).

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    • Everyday – The shift applies to everyday without exception.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    • Weekly – Allows for shifts that are used on a regular weekly pattern. Select the days that apply to this particular shift using the check boxes for the individual days. Indicate the frequency of this pattern weekly by adding a value to the every ____ weeks(s) field.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    • Yearly – Select a date range for the shift that will recur every year.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Date Selections Enter the date selections based upon the previous selection. Dates are inclusive.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  6. Click OK.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    The new non-working reason is added to the work schedule.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    About Work Skills

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Work skill is the job-specific skills necessary to perform an activity. These act as a defining criteria to match activities with the resources.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    The Work Skills feature lets you to capture the task attributes to assign the work. Work skills identifies the following attributes:
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    • The expertise of a resource

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    • The expertise required to perform an activity

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    You must create the work skills and then assign them to the resources and work skill conditions.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Create a Work Skill

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Work skills are client-specific sets of skills or competencies required of their resources to perform their assigned activities.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      2. In the General section, click Work Skills.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        The Work Skills screen appears.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      3. Click Add new.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        The Add work skill window appears.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      4. Complete the following fields:

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Field Description
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Name Enter a descriptive name for the work skill in at least one of the language fields (for example, New Install, Video, Outage, etc.). This is the wording that will appear to users within the application.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Label Enter a unique string for this work skill. This is how the work skill will be identified within the database.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Sharing of the skill in the team Select from the drop-down menu:
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        • Maximal — Team gets the maximal work skill level of all the team members (default).

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        • Minimal — Team gets the minimal work skill level of all the team members.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        • No Sharing —This work skill, if assigned to a team member, it does not affect skills of the team.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        • Summary — Team gets the total sum of work skill levels of all the team members The work skill sharing parameters will define if a specific activity can be assigned to a team-holder but not higher than 100.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Active Select the check box to activate. If active, the work skill and its conditions are used by the routing engine. If inactive, the skill and its conditions still exist but are not used by the routing module.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Work Skill Sharing Example
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Team gets the total sum of work skill levels of all the team members The work skill sharing parameters will define if a specific activity can be assigned to a team-holder but not higher than 100. In this example will consider how sharing influences work skill allocation in the group. Keep in mind that if a resource is assigned a group of work skills (G) and some work skills explicitly (WS), in case of intersection the explicitly assigned work skills will prevail. Resource that is not assigned any work skills is considered to obtain all the work skills with 100 qualification.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Work Skills Team Holder Team Member 1 Team Member 2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      WS0 - Maximal

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      WS1 - Maximal

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      WS2 – No Sharing

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      WS3 - Minimal WS4 – Summary

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      WS0 (100)

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      WS3 (100)

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      G: [WS3 (10), WS4(10)]

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      G: [WS0 (1),WS1 (1),WS2 (1) , WS3 (1), WS4 (1)] WS4(10)

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      G: [WS0(20), WS2(20)]

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      G: [WS0(30), WS2(30)]

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Effective work skills of the team-holder:
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      • WS0(100) - Maximal(100, 1, 30)

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      • WS1(1) - Maximal(0, 1, 0)

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      • WS2(0) – No Sharing (0, 1, 30), team-holder doesn't have this skill

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      • WS3(0) - Minimal(100, 1, 0)

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      • WS4(21) – Summary (10, 1, 10)

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Delete, Activate, or Deactivate a Work Skill

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        You cannot delete a work skill that is currently assigned to at least one resource. You can set the active/de-active status at any time.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. Click Configuration, Work Skills.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          The Work Skills screen appears.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        2. Select the check box next to the work skill that you want to delete, activate, or deactivate.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        3. Click Delete, Activate, or Deactivate.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        4. Click OK.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Temporary Work Skills

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Determine the skills required to perform an activity and the skills of the technicians. Based on these technician skills activities are assigned to perform.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          This feature allows you to set up a date range during which a skill is considered actual. These settings are part of the work skill settings of a resource and define the period during which the resource is considered having a certain skill of a certain level. This feature is helpful when some skills require periodic certification, some equipment is available for limited time only and if a planned maintenance is scheduled which requires special skills.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          If no work skills have been explicitly assigned to a resource, the resource is assumed to permanently have all work skills configured in the system with the maximum ratio. If any work skills have been assigned, the resource has only those work skills with the specified ratios.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          This video describes how to assign temporary work skills to a resource.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Define a Temporary Work Skill

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Set up the assignment period for each work skill or work skill group assigned to a resource. When a work skill or work skill group is selected for a resource, its start and end dates can be defined in the calendar.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. Open Settings > Resource Info > Work Skills

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          2. Click the add (plus) button.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            The Add Work Skills window opens, as shown in the following figure:
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            This figure shows the Resource info screen with the Add work skills and the calendar pop-up windows.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          3. Select the appropriate work skills from the list.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          4. (Optional) Assign the work skill ratio.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            If the ratio is not defined, the resource is considered to have the maximum work skill ratio of 100.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          5. Select the From and To dates of the skill assignment period from the Calendar.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            By default, the start date is always set to the current date making the work skill applicable immediately. If the start date is changed to a past date, it will still be replaced with the today's date, as the application does not support changes to past data. The end date can be left blank to mark the skill assigned permanently

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          6. Click Save.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            The work skill is assigned to the resource separated with semi colons. The name of each work skill is followed by its ratio and assignment dates in parentheses. The work skills are displayed according to the following rules:
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            • Work skills terminated in the past are not displayed

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            • Assignment dates are shown in the 'from… to…' format. When the start date is in the past, from date is not shown. When end date is not set, to date is not displayed.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            • If a work skill level is set to 100, the level is not displayed.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            • Inactive work skills are shown in gray font.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Note: If the resource is not assigned with the work skills, the resource is assumed to permanently have all the work skills configured in the system with the maximum work skill ratio.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            This video describes how to assign temporary work skills to a resource.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Edit Work Skills

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Update the work skills of a resource along with the assignment periods and work skill ratios. You can also delete the work skills of a resource.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. Open Settings > Resource Info > Work Skills

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          2. Click edit button.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            The Edit Work Skills window opens, as shown in the following figure:
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            This figure shows the Edit work skills screen, where you can edit the existing skills of the selected resource.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          3. Update the changes and click Save.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            The work skills are updated based on the following rules:
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            • Overlapping records with same work skill and same ratios are automatically merged into one. The start date of the merged record is the To date of the first record, and the end date of the merged record is the From date of the latest record

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            • Records with same work skills and different ratios will not be merged. Two different records are created. However, if their assignment periods overlap, the input is rejected with the message, Overlapping of intervals for the same skills is not allowed. The assignment periods have to be adjusted so that they no longer overlap. The following figure shows the Work skills screen, where you have tried to add the same work skill with overlapping intervals, and the corresponding error message:


                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              This figure shows the Work skills screen, where you have tried to add the same work skill with overlapping intervals, and the corresponding error message.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            • If a work skill is deleted, it is marked terminated on the previous day.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            • If a work skill is updated, the old work skill is marked terminated on the previous and the new work skill record starts from the current date.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Work Skill Conditions

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            To ensure that a resource has the ability to perform subsequently assigned activities, a correlation must be made between incoming activity skill requirements and the skills specified for each resource. The Work skill functionality is what that correlation is based on. Work skills are set up first, and then are assigned to resource records, with the appropriate levels of qualification set for each.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Incoming activities are also assigned Work Skills, which are then matched up with resources with corresponding skills during routing. For the application to know which Work Skills to assign to the activities, however, another correlation must be made. This correlation is referred to as Work Skill Conditions – criteria that is based on certain field values of activities. Work Skill Conditions are what the application uses to define which Work Skills should be assigned to activities. Each Work Skill has at least one condition that refers to a specific field and value in the incoming activity record. An example of this could be where an install Work Skill’s condition is to look for the field/value of “WO_TYPE = 1” (“1” being code for an install). If this condition were found within the activity record, then the application assigns that Work Skill to the activity.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            • The application assigns as many work skills to an activity record as there are conditions found.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            • If multiple works skills are assigned to an activity, then the same list of skills must be associated with a resource record in order for that resource to be considered for that job.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            • If required and preferred skill levels are used to define Work Skills and conditions, then routing matches activities to available resources with equal or higher qualifications of the skills as it determines who should be assigned which activities.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Create a Work Skill Condition

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              A work skill condition correlates incoming activity skill requirements with the skills possessed by resources. Work skill conditions are used to determine which activities are assigned to which resources.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              You must add work skills before adding work skill conditions.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              2. In the General section, click Work Skills.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              3. Click Work skill conditions.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                The Work skill conditions screen appears.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              4. Click Add new.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                The Add work skill condition dialog appears.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              5. Complete the following fields:

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Field Name Description
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Work skill name The work skill for which you want to add a condition. These work skills are created in the Add work skill dialog.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Required level The minimum qualification level of the skill a resource must have, to be considered for the activity. Only resources that have the required level or better skills are selected for the activity.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Preferable level If more than one resource meets or exceeds the required level, then the one(s) with the level that is closest in number to the “preferable level” is selected for the activity.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Add new condition A new condition for the work skill. Three new fields appear. Select the field for which you want to add the condition and select the condition. For example, suppose you want the work skill Install to be assigned to a technician who has a minimum skill level of 75, for work order types IN. Select the Work skill name as Install, enter 75 for Required level, click Add new condition and then select W/O Type, In, and IN.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              6. Click Save.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                The work skill condition is saved. When a new activity is added, these work skill conditions are used to determine which work skills are assigned to the activity.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Work Skill Groups

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Create a Work Skill Group

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                You can bundle selected work skills into work skill groups; this creates greater ease and flexibility for assigning skills to resources. You can continue to assign individual work skills along with work skill groups, creating a more accurate resource work skill record. Work skill groups must also be defined to be used for capacity categories, if different work skills must consume quota from a single capacity category.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                2. In the General section, click Work Skills.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                3. Click Work skill groups.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  The Work skill groups screen appears.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                4. Click Add new.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  The Add work skill group window appears.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                5. Complete the following fields:

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Field Description
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Name Enter the work skill group name. If you have set multiple languages for the application, input boxes appear for the different languages.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Label Enter a unique identifier for this work skill group.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Active Select the check box to make this work skill group active.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Can be assigned to a resource Select the check box if you want the work skill group to be able to be assigned to a resource record. If a group is assigned to a resource, then that the resource obtains all the work skills defined for the group.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Can be added to a capacity category Select the check box if you want the work skill group to be able to be assigned to a capacity category. If a capacity category contains a group of work skills, then an activity is considered a match to the category if it 'requires' at least one of work skills from the group.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                6. Click Save.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  The Work skill groups screen appears.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                7. Click the pencil icon in the Work Skills cell to add work skills and their qualification level.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  The Edit work skill window appears.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                8. Click to select the work skill and activate the Qualification Level field.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                9. Click Save when done.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                10. To modify a work skill group, click the Name cell.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  The Edit work skill group: [Work skill group name] window appears, which is similar to the Add work skill group window.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Delete a Work Skill Group

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  You can bundle selected work skills into work skill groups; this creates greater ease and flexibility for assigning skills to resources. You can continue to assign individual work skills along with work skill groups, creating a more accurate resource work skill record. Work skill groups must also be defined to be used for capacity categories, if different work skills need to consume quota from a single capacity category.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  2. In the General section, click Work Skills.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  3. Click Work skill groups.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    The Work skill groups screen appears.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  4. Select the check box next to the work skill group that you want to delete.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  5. Click Delete.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  6. Click OK.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Work Zone

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    A work zone is the defined geographical area within which a resource can perform activities. Work zones are defined within the work zone dictionary, and are then assigned to resource records.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    A temporary work zone is a work zone that is not a resource’s typical work zone, but that is assigned to the resource for a specific period of time. Temporary work zones override a resource's regularly assigned work zones. A work zone key consists of a field (or combination of fields) and length-specific values, that when identified within an activity record, determines which work zone gets associated with that activity. You can view, add, and modify work zones from the Work Zone screen.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Routing assigns activities to resources taking into account the work zones of those resources and assigning only those activities that are within his or her work zone.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Add a Work Zone

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Work Zone is unique to each company and reflects how geographic regions are divided for more effective and efficient routing.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Ensure that you have added the required travel areas.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      2. In the General section, click Work Zones.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        The Work Zones screen appears.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      3. Click Add new.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        The Add Work Zone window appears.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      4. Fill up the following fields:

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Field Description
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Work Zone Name A meaningful name to describe the group of Work Zone key values that make up the Work Zone.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Work Zone Label A unique identifier for the Work Zone.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Status Status of the Work Zone—active or inactive.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Delimiter Choose whether commas separate locations in the Work Zone Keys list or each location appears on a new line.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Travel Area A higher level bundling of zones used by the application’s statistics engine.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Work Zone Keys Values within and formatted as defined by the overall Work Zone field key, that will positively associate an incoming activity with a particular Work Zone.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Actions Click Modify to edit the Work Zone.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Work Zone Shapes

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Work Zone shapes are used as visual representations of Work Zones on the map and, as a tool for yet more subtle definition of Work Zones. For example, if the company chooses to define its Work Zones by city names or postal codes the Work Zones may be rather large. At the same time, several shapes can be attached to the Work Zone dividing it into geographically smaller areas. This way, one team can work in one shape and another team – in another shape while still working in the same Work Zone. Work Zone shapes are displayed in Core Manage and Mobility.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        If used, enter the shape identifier. The property serving as the shape identifier is defined during the shape configuration via the Metadata API. For example, if ZIP code is used as shape identifier, enter one or more ZIP codes associated with Work Zone shapes.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      5. Click Add.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        The Work Zone is saved.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Note: The Work Zone identifiers must be unique. If the identifier has already been used for another Work Zone, the input is rejected with the error message: Key {identifier} conflicts with key {identifier} of Work Zone {work_zone_name}.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        View Work Zone

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Work Zone is unique to each company and reflects how geographic regions are divided for more effective and efficient routing. The keys that define zones can be anything with geographic relation – a zip code, address portion, network items (nodes, sub-nodes…), map grids, or even geo-coding.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        2. In the General section, click Work Zones.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          The Work Zones screen appears and displays the following fields:

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Field Description
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          ID System-generated number used to identify a unique Work Zone.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Status The Work Zone can be active and available for routing or inactive and not available for routing. Green tick mark indicates active and red cross indicates inactive.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Work Zone Name A meaningful name to describe the group of Work Zone key values that make up the Work Zone.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Work Zone Keys The exact values that can be found within the primary key (field) that are used to associate the activity record with a Work Zone.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Actions Click Modify to edit the Work Zone.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Shapes Link appears if one or more shapes have been added to at least one Work Zone. Clicking Shape opens the map showing the shapes associated with the selected Work Zone. For adjacent shapes the map shows one common area formed by the combined shapes.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        3. Click View to filter the Work Zones.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Modify a Work Zone

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          After you create a Work Zone, you cannot delete it, but you can activate or deactivate it. You can also modify the work zone by changing the name, or by adding or removing locations from it.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          2. In the General section, click Work Zones.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            The Work Zones screen appears.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          3. Click Modify for the Work Zone that you want to modify.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            The Edit Work Zone window appears.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          4. Change as required and click Update.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Current activities are recalculated per the modifications. Any future activities will be routed according to the newly modified Work Zones. For precautionary reasons, any Work Zone changes must be performed outside of the application’s peak usage time.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Note: Changing the status of a Work Zone to Inactive stops routing from using the Work Zone or any of its locations.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Modify a Work Zone Key

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            A work zone key helps you identify a work zone with a short name. The work zones that you create are automatically assigned with the key or convention that you define in the Work Zone Key dialog. By default, City is the work zone key in the application.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1. Click Configuration.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            2. In the General section, click Work Zones.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            3. Click Modify next to Work Zone Key in the header area.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              The Work Zone Key dialog appears.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            4. To retain City as the key and just change the length of the key, change the number in the Length field. In the next field, select whether you want the entire key as case insensitive, or just the first letter.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            5. Click OK.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              The existing work zone keys are modified to conform to the new configuration.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            6. To add a new field as the key, click the plus icon in the Work Zone Key dialog.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              The list of fields available in the application is displayed in alphabetical order.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            7. Select a field of your choice and click Add.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              The newly added field is displayed in the Work Zone Key dialog.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            8. Add the length of the key in the Length field. In the next field, select whether you want the entire key as case insensitive, or just the first letter.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            9. Click OK.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              The modifications are applied to the existing work zone keys.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Export and Import Work Zones

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              You can export and import Work Zones to move the information between two instances. You can export and import Work Zones either through API or through the user interface. The Export and Import buttons available on the Work Zones screen.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              1. Click Configuration > Work Zones.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              2. Click Export.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                An XML file is generated with the following information:
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                • XML format and product version

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                • Information about Work Zone keys

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  • field

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  • property (can be present only if 'field' equals 'property')

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  • function ('case insensitive' or 'first word case insensitive')

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  • length

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  • order

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                • Information about Work Zones:

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  • Work Zone name

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  • travel area

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  • status (active or inactive)

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  • Work Zone shapes

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  • Work Zone keys (order and formula are taken into account)

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              3. To import Work Zones, click Import.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                You can import only the Work Zones that are exported from this application.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              4. Click Browse and select the file that you want to import and then click Import.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                The Work Zones are imported based on the following rules:
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                • Work Zone keys and shape IDs for imported Work Zones must be unique. If either of them is not unique, the Work Zone is not imported.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                • If a Work Zone is present in the company configuration and is absent in the imported XML file, the Work Zone is deactivated.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                • If a Work Zone is present in both, company configuration and imported XML file, it is updated if valid.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                • If a Work Zone is absent in the company configuration and is present in the imported XML file, it is created if valid.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                The Work Zones are imported and the summary of results is displayed. The results show the number of successfully imported Work Zones and number of Work Zones which failed to import.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Work Zone export XML structure

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              When you export Work Zones, an XML file is generated. This topic provides a sample structure.

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              <workZones formatVersion="1" productVersion="16.8.0">
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  <workZoneRules>
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      <rule field="ccity" collation="case insensitive" length="4" order="0" />
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  </workZoneRules>
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  <items>
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      <item status="active" travelArea="sunrise_enterprise" workZoneLabel="ALTAMONTE SPRINGS" workZoneName="ALTAMONTE SPRINGS">
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          <keys>
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              <key>alta</key>
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          </keys>
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          <shapes>
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              <shape>cass</shape>
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              <shape>gene</shape>
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          </shapes>
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      </item>
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      <item status="active" travelArea="sunrise_enterprise" workZoneLabel="TEX" workZoneName="TEXAS">
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          <keys>
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              <key>andr</key>
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              <key>colo</key>
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              <key>kerm</key>
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              <key>lubb</key>
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              <key>midl</key>
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              <key>odes</key>
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          </keys>
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          <shapes>
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              <shape>wint</shape>
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              <shape>port</shape>
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          </shapes>
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      </item>
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  <items>
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              </workZones>